s
10
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
Contents, Foreword
General technical data
Subracks
CPU module
Coupling memory module
Input/output modules
Communications support
modules
Technology subrack
Program memory /
Interface modules
Plug-in cables
Operator control panel OP2
Index
Hardware
SIMADYN D
Manual
Edition 04.2011
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
This Manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal
safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are
highlighted in the Manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to
the level of danger:
!
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
!
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
!
CAUTION used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in property damage.
NOTICE used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided,
may result in an undesireable result or state.
Note the following:
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the
catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components
from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
SIMATIC and SIMADYN D are registered trademarks of Siemens AG.
Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer
to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.
Safety guidelines
Correct usage
Marken
Copyright SIEMENS AG 2006 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design,
are reserved.
Siemens AG
A&D AS CC DC
Frauenauracher Straße 80
91056 Erlangen
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with
the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be
precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement.
However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any
necessary corrections included in subsequent editions.
Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
Siemens AG 2006
Technical data subject to change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E01114837-02
Hardware - SIMADYN D iii
Edition 04.2011
Editions
SIMADYN D
Manual
Hardware
Edition 04.2011
NOTE Please note that the current edition of this documentation contains
different editions of the individual chapters. The following overview tells
you when a chapter was revised the last time.
Chapter Edition
Foreword Edition 12.2004
1 General technical data Edition 08.2005
2 Subracks Edition 04.2011
3 CPU module Edition 03.2001
4 Coupling memory module Edition 03.2001
5 Input/output modules Edition 12.2004
6 Communications support modules Edition 12.2004
7 Technology subrack Edition 03.2001
8 Program memory modules / Interface modules Edition 04.2011
9 Plug-in cables Edition 06.2002
10 Operator control panel OP2 Edition 03.2001
Overview
(chapter editions)
Editions
iv Hardware - SIMADYN D
Ausgabe 12.2003
Hardware - SIMADYN D v
Edition 12.2004
Foreword
This Manual explains the principle use and functions of the STEP 7
automation software with the main focus on the appropriate technological
and drive control components T400, FM 458-1 DP, SIMADYN D,
SIMATIC TDC or D7-SYS.
TDC: Technology and Drives Control
This Manual addresses programmers and commissioning engineers.
General knowhow regarding automation technology is required in order to
understand the contents of the Manual
This Manual is valid for SIMATIC D7-SYS Version 6.2.
If you have questions relating to the use of the products described in the
Manual, which cannot be answered here, then please contact your local
Siemens office. You can also call the Hotline:
• Tel.: +49 (180) 5050-222
• Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223
• e-mail: adsupport@siemens.com
Appropriate training courses are available in order to make it easier to get
to know the SIMADYN D automation system. Please contact the central
Training Center in D-Erlangen (I&S IS INA TC):
• Tel.: +49 (9131) 7-27689, -27972
• Fax: +49 (9131) 7-28172
• Internet: www.siemens.de/sibrain
• Intranet: http://info-tc.erlm.siemens.de/
NOTE This user part of the Manual does not include any detailed
information/instructions with individual descriptions, but is only intended
to provide a basic procedure. More detailed information on the dialog
boxes in the software and how they are handled is provided in the
appropriate online help.
Purpose of this
Manual
Basic knowledge
required
Validity of the
Manual
Additional support
Training Center
Foreword
vi Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
This manual is part of the overall documentation for the technological and
drive control components T400, FM 458, SIMADYN D, SIMATIC TDC
and SIMATIC D7-SYS:
Title Content
System and
communications
configuring D7-SYS
The first project in a few steps
This Section provides an extremely simple entry into the methodology when
assembling and programming the SIMATIC TDC/SIMADYN D control
system. It is especially conceived for first-time users of a control system.
System software
This Section provides basic know-how about the structure of the operating
system and an application program of a CPU. It should be used to obtain an
overview of the programming methodology, and basis for configuring user
programs.
Communications configuring
This section provides you with basic know-how about the communication
possibilities and how you configure links to the communication partners.
Changeover from STRUC V4.x to D7-SYS
Essential features are included in this section, which have changed over
STRUC V4.x with the introduction of SIMATIC D7-SYS.
STEP 7 option packages
for D7-SYS
Basis software
This section explains the essential use and the functions of the STEP 7
automation software. For first users, it provides an overview on configuring,
programming and commissioning a station.
When working with the basis software, you can access the online help which
provides you with support when it comes to detailed questions on using the
software.
CFC
The CFC language (Continuous Function Chart) allows you to graphically
interconnect blocks.
When working with the particular software, you can also use the online help
which can answer detailed questions regarding the use of the
editors/compiler.
SFC
Configuring sequence controls using SFC (Sequential Function Chart) of
SIMATIC S7.
In the SFC editor, you generate a sequence chart using graphic resources.
The SFC elements of the chart are then positioned according to specific
rules.
Hardware The complete hardware spectrum is described as reference in this Manuals.
Function blocks These Reference Manuals provide you with an overview of selected function
blocks for the associated technological and drive control components T400,
FM 458-1 DP, SIMADYN D and SIMATIC TDC.
Information
overview
Foreword
Hardware - SIMADYN D vii
Edition 12.2004
As first time user, we recommend that this Manual is used as follows:
• Please read the first section on using the software in order to get to
know some of the terminology and basic procedure.
• Then use the particular sections of the Manual if you wish to carry-out
certain processing steps (e.g. loading programs).
If you have already executed a small project, and have gained some
experience, then you can read individual sections of the Manual in order
to get up to speed about a specific subject.
Can be accessed globally at any time of the day:
World-wide
(Nürnberg)
Technical Support
Local time: 0:00 to 24:00 / 365 days
Phone: +49 (180) 5050-222
Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223
E-Mail: adsupport@siemens.com
GMT: +1:00
Europe / Africa
(Nürnberg)
Authorization
Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00
Phone: +49 (180) 5050-222
Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223
E-Mail: adsupport@siemens.com
GMT: +1:00
United States
(Johnson City)
Technical Support and
Authorization
Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00
Phone: +1 (423) 262 2522
Fax: +1 (423) 262 2289
E-Mail:
simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com
GMT: -5:00
Asia / Australia
(Peking)
Technical Support and
Authorization
Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00
Phone: +86 10 64 75 75 75
Fax: +86 10 64 74 74 74
E-Mail: adsupport.asia@siemens.com
GMT: +8:00
Technical Support and Authorization speak generally German and English.
Guide
A&D Technical
Support
Foreword
viii Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
Hardware - SIMADYN D vii
Edition 05.2006
Contens
Foreword ......................................................................................................................................... v
1 General technical data........................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Installation and EMC guidelines ............................................................................ 1-2
1.1.1 Definitions .............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.1.1 Qualified personnel................................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.1.2 Danger and warning information ........................................................................... 1-3
1.1.2 Introduction ............................................................................................................ 1-4
1.1.3 Use and operation ................................................................................................. 1-4
1.1.4 Machinery Directive ............................................................................................... 1-5
1.1.4.1 SIMADYN D outputs .............................................................................................. 1-5
1.1.4.2 Professionally-trained and knowledgeable personnel........................................... 1-6
1.1.4.3 CE Mark ................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.1.4.4 Connecting external voltages ................................................................................ 1-6
1.1.5 Mounting ................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.1.6 Cables.................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.1.7 Potential bonding ................................................................................................... 1-6
1.1.8 Principle when connecting components ................................................................ 1-7
1.1.9 Potential bonding rail ............................................................................................. 1-7
1.1.10 Actual example of a multi-motor drive ................................................................... 1-8
1.1.11 Protective grounding.............................................................................................. 1-9
1.1.12 Radios.................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.1.13 Cabinet................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.1.14 Mounting clearances............................................................................................ 1-10
1.1.15 Power loss in the cabinet..................................................................................... 1-11
1.1.16 Power supply ....................................................................................................... 1-12
1.1.17 Subracks .............................................................................................................. 1-13
1.1.18 Cables.................................................................................................................. 1-14
1.1.19 Mounting SIMADYN D unit in drive converters.................................................... 1-14
1.2 ESD guidelines .................................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.1 What is ESD?....................................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.2 Handling ESD modules........................................................................................ 1-15
1.2.3 Measuring and making changes on ESD modules ............................................. 1-16
1.2.4 Transporting modules .......................................................................................... 1-17
1.3 Ambient conditions .............................................................................................. 1-18
Contens
viii Hardware - SIMADYN D
Ausgabe 05.2006
2 Subracks ................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Subracks SR6, SR6V............................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.1 Power supply ......................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Voltage monitoring functions ................................................................................. 2-3
2.1.3 Battery back-up ...................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.4 Backplane bus .......................................................................................................2-5
2.1.5 Ventilation/cooling.................................................................................................. 2-6
2.1.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................... 2-7
2.1.7 Technical data........................................................................................................ 2-8
2.1.8 Dimension drawings............................................................................................. 2-10
2.2 Subracks SR12 and SR24................................................................................... 2-13
2.2.1 Power supply ....................................................................................................... 2-13
2.2.2 Voltage monitoring functions ............................................................................... 2-15
2.2.3 Battery back-up .................................................................................................... 2-16
2.2.4 Backplane buses.................................................................................................. 2-17
2.2.5 Ventilation/cooling................................................................................................ 2-19
2.2.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................. 2-19
2.2.7 Technical data...................................................................................................... 2-21
2.2.8 Dimension drawings............................................................................................. 2-23
2.3 Subrack SRT400.................................................................................................. 2-26
2.3.1 Power supply ....................................................................................................... 2-26
2.3.2 Voltage monitoring functions ............................................................................... 2-27
2.3.3 Battery back-up .................................................................................................... 2-28
2.3.4 Backplane bus .....................................................................................................2-28
2.3.5 Ventilation/cooling................................................................................................ 2-28
2.3.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................. 2-28
2.3.7 Technical data...................................................................................................... 2-29
3 CPU module ............................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 CPU module PM5 .................................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.1 Supplementary components .................................................................................. 3-7
3.1.2 Application information and noise immunity .......................................................... 3-7
3.1.3 Connector assignments ......................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.4 Technical data........................................................................................................ 3-8
3.1.5 Connector assignments ......................................................................................... 3-9
3.1.6 Connection diagram.............................................................................................3-10
3.2 CPU module PM6 ................................................................................................ 3-11
3.2.1 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 3-15
3.2.2 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 3-15
3.2.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 3-15
3.2.4 Connection diagram.............................................................................................3-16
3.3 Signal processor module EP3 with IS_x.............................................................. 3-17
Contens
Hardware - SIMADYN D ix
Ausgabe 05.2006
4 Coupling memory module..................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Coupling memory modules MM11, MM3, MM4..................................................... 4-2
4.1.1 Real-time clock in the MM3 coupling memory module.......................................... 4-3
4.1.2 Technical data MM11, MM3, MM4 ........................................................................ 4-7
5 Input/output modules............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Input/output modules EA12 ................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Supplementary components.................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.2 Connector assignment X5 ..................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.3 Application information and noise immunity .......................................................... 5-4
5.1.4 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 5-5
5.1.5 Connecting diagram............................................................................................... 5-6
5.2 Input/output module EB11 ..................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.1 Supplementary components.................................................................................. 5-8
5.2.2 Connector- and terminal assignment..................................................................... 5-9
5.2.2.1 Terminal assignment for SC55 .............................................................................. 5-9
5.2.2.2 Terminal assignment for SC13 ............................................................................ 5-11
5.2.3 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 5-13
5.2.4 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 5-14
5.2.5 Connecting diagram............................................................................................. 5-15
5.3 Expansion module IT41 ....................................................................................... 5-16
5.3.1 Supplementary components................................................................................ 5-19
5.3.2 Connector assignment X6 ................................................................................... 5-20
5.3.3 Connector assignment X7 ................................................................................... 5-22
5.3.3.1 Connector assignment X7 for SC49 .................................................................... 5-23
5.3.3.2 Connector assignment X7 for SC54 .................................................................... 5-25
5.3.4 Mounting .............................................................................................................. 5-27
5.3.5 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 5-27
5.3.6 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 5-28
5.3.7 Connecting diagrams........................................................................................... 5-31
5.4 Expansion module IT42 ....................................................................................... 5-33
5.4.1 Supplementary components................................................................................ 5-34
5.4.2 Connector assignment X6 ................................................................................... 5-35
5.4.3 Connector assignment X7 ................................................................................... 5-35
5.4.4 Connector assignment X8 ................................................................................... 5-37
5.4.4.1 Connector assignment X8 for SC49 .................................................................... 5-37
5.4.4.2 Connector assignment X8 for SC54 .................................................................... 5-39
5.4.5 Mounting .............................................................................................................. 5-41
5.4.6 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 5-41
5.4.7 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 5-42
5.4.8 Connecting diagram............................................................................................. 5-44
5.5 Converter control ITDC........................................................................................ 5-45
5.5.1 Supplementary components................................................................................ 5-48
5.5.2 Connector assignment X5 ................................................................................... 5-49
Contens
x Hardware - SIMADYN D
Ausgabe 05.2006
5.5.3 Connector assignment X6 ...................................................................................5-50
5.5.4 Connector assignment X7 ...................................................................................5-50
5.5.5 Technical data...................................................................................................... 5-53
5.5.6 Mounting/Installation ............................................................................................ 5-54
5.5.7 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 5-55
5.5.8 Connecting diagrams ........................................................................................... 5-55
6 Communications support modules ...................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Communications support modules CS .................................................................. 6-2
6.1.1 Communications support module CS7 .................................................................. 6-2
6.1.1.1 Application information and noise immunity .......................................................... 6-4
6.1.1.2 Technical data........................................................................................................ 6-6
6.1.1.3 Connecting diagram............................................................................................... 6-7
6.1.2 Communications support module CS8 .................................................................. 6-8
6.1.2.1 Application information and noise immunity .......................................................... 6-9
6.1.2.2 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-11
6.1.2.3 Connection diagram.............................................................................................6-11
6.2 SINEC H1 module CSH11................................................................................... 6-12
6.2.1 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 6-13
6.2.2 Connector assignment of the interfaces ..............................................................6-13
6.2.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-14
6.3 Fiber-optic cable subrack coupling CS12-CS22.................................................. 6-15
6.3.1 Slave connection.................................................................................................. 6-16
6.3.2 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 6-19
6.3.3 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 6-19
6.3.4 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-20
6.4 SIMOLINK interface ITSL .................................................................................... 6-21
6.4.1 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 6-21
6.4.2 Mounting .............................................................................................................. 6-21
6.4.3 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 6-21
6.4.4 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-22
6.5 Interface module SS1 .......................................................................................... 6-23
6.5.1 Pin assignment .................................................................................................... 6-26
6.5.2 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-26
6.6 Interface module SS2 .......................................................................................... 6-27
6.6.1 Pin assignment .................................................................................................... 6-27
6.6.2 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-28
6.7 Interface module SS31 ........................................................................................ 6-29
6.7.1 Pin assignment .................................................................................................... 6-29
6.7.2 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-30
6.8 Communications module SS4 ............................................................................. 6-31
6.8.1 Connecting programmers or PC .......................................................................... 6-31
6.8.2 USS connection for OP2, VD1............................................................................. 6-33
Contens
Hardware - SIMADYN D xi
Ausgabe 05.2006
6.8.3 Supplementary components................................................................................ 6-36
6.8.4 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................. 6-36
6.8.5 SS4 diagnostic functions ..................................................................................... 6-37
6.8.6 Connector assignment X5 ................................................................................... 6-39
6.8.7 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 6-40
6.9 Communication modules SS5, SS52 .................................................................. 6-41
6.9.1 Supplementary components................................................................................ 6-42
6.9.2 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................. 6-43
6.9.3 Diagnostics LED .................................................................................................. 6-43
6.9.4 Connector assignment X5 ................................................................................... 6-44
6.9.5 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 6-46
7 Technology subrack ..............................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Technology subrack SRT400 ................................................................................ 7-2
7.2 Technology module T400 ...................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1 General features .................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Mechanical design, terminals ................................................................................ 7-4
7.2.3 Incremental encoder with coarse- and fine-pulse evaluation ................................ 7-4
7.2.3.1 Pulse encoder 2..................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.4 Absolute value encoders ....................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.5 Serial interfaces ..................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.5.1 Bus termination...................................................................................................... 7-8
7.2.5.2 Communications switch ......................................................................................... 7-8
7.2.6 Synchronizing possibilities..................................................................................... 7-9
7.2.7 Parameters .......................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.8 Terminal assignment ........................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.9 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 7-12
8 Program memory modules / Interface modules.................................................................. 8-1
8.1 Program memory modules MS5, MS51, MS52 ..................................................... 8-2
8.1.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 Interface module SE13.1 ....................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.1 Application information .......................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.2 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.3 Connector assignment X1 ..................................................................................... 8-6
8.3 Interface module SE26.1 ....................................................................................... 8-7
8.3.1 Application information .......................................................................................... 8-8
8.3.2 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.3 Connector assignment........................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.4 Diagram ............................................................................................................... 8-10
8.4 Interface module SB10 ........................................................................................ 8-11
8.4.1 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-12
8.4.2 Application information ........................................................................................ 8-13
Contens
xii Hardware - SIMADYN D
Ausgabe 05.2006
8.4.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-14
8.4.4 Connector assignment......................................................................................... 8-15
8.4.5 Block diagram ......................................................................................................8-16
8.5 Interface module SB60 ........................................................................................ 8-17
8.5.1 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-18
8.5.2 Application information......................................................................................... 8-18
8.5.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-19
8.5.4 Connector assignment......................................................................................... 8-20
8.5.5 Block diagram ......................................................................................................8-21
8.6 Interface module SB61 ........................................................................................ 8-22
8.6.1 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-23
8.6.2 Application information......................................................................................... 8-24
8.6.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-26
8.6.4 Connector assignment......................................................................................... 8-27
8.6.5 Block diagram ......................................................................................................8-28
8.7 Interface module SB70 ........................................................................................ 8-29
8.7.1 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-30
8.7.2 Application information......................................................................................... 8-31
8.7.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-32
8.7.4 Connector assignment......................................................................................... 8-33
8.7.5 Block diagram ......................................................................................................8-34
8.8 Interface module SB71 ........................................................................................ 8-35
8.8.1 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-36
8.8.2 Application information......................................................................................... 8-37
8.8.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-38
8.8.4 Connector assignment......................................................................................... 8-39
8.8.5 Block diagram ......................................................................................................8-40
8.9 Interface modules SU10, SU11, SU12, SU13 ..................................................... 8-41
8.9.1 Function description............................................................................................. 8-42
8.9.2 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 8-43
8.9.3 Application information......................................................................................... 8-44
8.9.4 Pin/terminal assignment X1/X2............................................................................ 8-44
8.9.5 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-46
9 Plug-in cables ......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 General information ............................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Cable types ............................................................................................................9-4
Contens
Hardware - SIMADYN D xiii
Ausgabe 05.2006
10 Operator control panel OP2 ................................................................................................ 10-1
10.1 Function overview................................................................................................ 10-2
10.2 Process data handling ......................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.1 General information ............................................................................................. 10-3
10.2.2 Behavior at run-up ............................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.3 Operator control overview for process data handling.......................................... 10-4
10.3 Binary value processing....................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.1 Message system processing ............................................................................... 10-6
10.3.2 Message on the display....................................................................................... 10-7
10.3.3 Message print-out ................................................................................................ 10-8
10.4 System operation............................................................................................... 10-10
10.4.1 Function overview.............................................................................................. 10-10
10.4.2 Parameterizing the message system processing.............................................. 10-11
10.4.3 Parameterizing for process data........................................................................ 10-12
10.4.4 Parameterizing for the USS interface ................................................................ 10-13
10.4.5 Parameterization for the printer ......................................................................... 10-14
10.4.6 End of system operation .................................................................................... 10-15
10.4.7 Parameterizing the display options.................................................................... 10-15
10.4.8 Self-test.............................................................................................................. 10-15
10.5 System run-up.................................................................................................... 10-18
10.5.1 Establishing a communications link to SIMADYN D.......................................... 10-18
10.6 Handling OP2 errors .......................................................................................... 10-20
10.6.1 System messages ............................................................................................. 10-20
10.6.2 Operating messages.......................................................................................... 10-21
10.7 Front panel......................................................................................................... 10-24
10.8 Unit dimensions and mechanical mounting....................................................... 10-25
10.9 Battery change................................................................................................... 10-26
10.10 Connecting elements ......................................................................................... 10-26
10.11 Power supply ..................................................................................................... 10-27
10.12 Baud rates.......................................................................................................... 10-27
10.13 Cables and connectors...................................................................................... 10-27
10.14 Using a printer with OP2.................................................................................... 10-29
10.14.1 Configuring the printer ....................................................................................... 10-29
10.14.2 Printer connection.............................................................................................. 10-29
10.15 Labeling and replacing the labeling strips ......................................................... 10-30
Index .............................................................................................................................................. I-1
Contens
xiv Hardware - SIMADYN D
Ausgabe 05.2006
General technical data
1-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 08.2005
1.1 Installation and EMC guidelines
NOTE The information in this Manual does not purport to cover all details or
variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency
to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems
arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes,
please contact your local Siemens office.
Further, the contents of this Manual shall not become a part of or
modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship.
The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The
warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole
warranty of Siemens. Any statements contained herein do not create
new warranties nor modify the existing warranty.
1.1.1 Definitions
1.1.1.1 Qualified personnel
For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, a „Qualified person“ is
someone who is familiar with the installation, mounting, start-up and
operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she must
have the following qualifications, for example:
1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and
tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in
accordance with established safety procedures.
3. Trained in rendering first aid
General technical data
Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-3
Edition 08.2005
1
1.1.1.2 Danger and warning information
!
DANGER For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, „Danger“ indicates
death, severe personal injury and/or substantial property damage will
result if proper precautions are not taken.
!
WARNING For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, „Warning“ indicates
death, severe personal injury or property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.
!
CAUTION For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, „Caution“ indicates
that minor personal injury or material damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.
NOTE For the purpose of this Manual, „Note“ indicates information about the
product or the respective part of the Instruction Manual which is
essential to highlight.
!
CAUTION This board contains components which can be destroyed by
electrostatic discharge. Prior to touching any electronics board, your
body must be electrically discharged. This can be simply done by
touching a conductive, grounded object immediately beforehand (e.g.
bare metal cabinet components, socket protective conductor contact).
!
WARNING Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during
operation.
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in severe personal
injury or property damage.
It is especially important that the warning information in all of the
relevant Operating Instructions/Instruction Manuals are strictly
observed.
General technical data
1-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 08.2005
1.1.2 Introduction
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical device
to function, fault-free in a specified electromagnetic environment without
influencing the environment in an inadmissible fashion.
This design- and EMC guideline supplements the documentation on the
individual components.
The SIMADYN D control system consists of individual components (e. g.
subracks, modules, interface modules, operator control panels, position
transmitters). The components can be installed in the widest range of
system configurations according to individual requirements. When the
components are arranged in a distributed fashion (decentral topology) a
noisy environment cannot be neglected. Thus, specific requirements are
placed on the design and EMC of the system.
EMC represents a quality feature for
• Intrinsic noise immunity: Immunity against internal electrical noise
and disturbances
• External noise immunity: Immunity against external electromagnetic
noise
• Noise emission level: Influencing the environment due to
electromagnetic radiation
In order to achieve the highest possible operational reliability and safety
and noise immunity for a complete system (closed-loop control and drive
motor) the control manufacturer and user (including end customers) must
take certain measures.
Perfect functioning of SIMADYN D can only be guaranteed and the legal
requirements fulfilled (89/336/EC) if all of these measures are observed.
1.1.3 Use and operation
SIMADYN D components are designed for use in industrial environments
in accordance with EN 50081-2 and
EN 50082-2. They may not be operated or connected to the public low-
voltage network.
What is EMC ?
Operational
reliability and noise
immunity
General technical data
Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-5
Edition 08.2005
1
1.1.4 Machinery Directive
In accordance with the Machinery Directive 89/392/EC, it should be
ensured that if SIMADYN D fails or executes an incorrect function, that
this does not result in the machine/system going into a potentially
hazardous condition. This must always be taken into account when
configuring the machine/system.
The system may not be commissioned until it has been proven that the
final product is in conformance with the Directive.
The Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EC is only applicable for products with
supply voltages of ≥ 50 V AC and/or > 75V DC.
For SIMADYN D, this involves the following components:
• SP 7 6DD 1683-0BB0
• SP 8.5 6DD 1683-0BC0
• SP 9.5 6DD 1683-0BE5
• SP 22.5 6DD 1683-0CC5
• SP 23.5 6DD 1683-0CD5
• SB 60 6DD 1681-0AF4
• SB 70 6DD 1681-0AG2
• SRT 400 6DD 1662-0CG0
These components correspond to the requirements of the Low-Voltage
Directive.
!
WARNING Open equipment
SIMADYN D is regarded as open equipment. This means that you
must always install SIMADYN D in a cubicle, cabinet or electrical
control room that can only be accessed using a key or tool. Only
trained or authorized personnel are allowed access to such
cubicles, cabinets or electrical operating rooms.
1.1.4.1 SIMADYN D outputs
!
DANGER When the equipment is powered-up or powered -on, the outputs
have undefined statuses while the power supply voltages are
running-up. This fact must be taken into account when designing
the system.
Low-Voltage
Directive
General technical data
1-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 08.2005
1.1.4.2 Professionally-trained and knowledgeable personnel
Only professionally-trained, knowledgeable personnel may configure,
install, commission and operate SIMADYN D.
1.1.4.3 CE Mark
SIMADYN D components have no CE Mark for the following reasons:
• they cannot be practically used autonomously
• they are not generally available
• they can only be used by specially-trained personnel
NOTE If a CE Mark is required, this is the responsibility of the manufacturer of
the machine/complete system.
1.1.4.4 Connecting external voltages
If external voltages (e. g. pulse encoders) are connected to SIMADYN D
inputs, which are supplied from an external power supply, then this
external supply must also be shutdown when the SIMADYN D power
supply is shutdown or fails.
1.1.5 Mounting
SIMADYN D components must be mounted in a metal cabinet, enclosed
on all sides.
1.1.6 Cables
All signal cables which are connected to SIMADYN D must be screened.
1.1.7 Potential bonding
In order to ensure disturbance-free operation, the components which are
connected and communicate with one another may not be at different
potentials. This means that all components must be connected with one
another through potential bonding cables.
General technical data
Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-7
Edition 08.2005
1
1.1.8 Principle when connecting components
All of the components (subracks, power supplies etc.), which are
connected using signal cables, must also be connected with potential
bonding cables (exception: Components with fiber-optic cable
connections).
Subrack
A
Potential bondin
g
conductor
EBG
Subrack
B
Subrack
C
1.1.9 Potential bonding rail
A potential bonding- or grounding rail must be provided in each cabinet to
allow simple wiring.
All of the internal and external components must be connected to this
potential bonding- and grounding rail.
SIMADYN D
A
SIMADYN D
B
Schaltschrank
Switching cubicle
< 2 m
LEISTUNGS-
KOMPONENTEN
POWER
COMPONENTS
fest mit Schrankholm
verbunden
connected fixed
with cubicle beam
Basic circuit
General technical data
1-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 08.2005
1.1.10 Actual example of a multi-motor drive
Schaltschrank n
Switching cubicle n
SV
Schirmschiene
(Zackenschiene)
Ground bus
SV
P24 M
Erd-/Potentialausgleichsschiene
Earth circuit-connector
Schaltschrank 2
Switching cubicle 2
SV
Schaltschrank 1
Switching cubicle 1
SV
Potentialausgleichsleitung
Voltage equalazing cable
16 mm2
P24M
External power supply
Externe SV
Interface Modul
Interface modul
Externe Verbindungen
External connections
< 2 m
6 mm2
Externe Verbindungen
External connections
SIMADYN D SIMADYN D SIMADYN D
General technical data
Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-9
Edition 08.2005
1
1.1.11 Protective grounding
The protective ground is connected via the protective conductor (PE) at
the cabinets and components. For SIMADYN D, the potential bonding
conductor/cable does not have a protective conductor function. For
SIMADYN D it is required for reliable operation and noise suppression.
The protective conductor must be routed in accordance with DIN VDE
0100 and DIN VDE 0160.
For subracks, the protective conductor cross-section must be
≥ 6 mm2 and for cabinets, ≥ 10 mm2.
1.1.12 Radios
It is not permissible to use radios > 2W close to SIMADYN D.
For low-rating radios, a distance of > 1m must be maintained between
the radio and SIMADYN D.
1.1.13 Cabinet
• All SIMADYN D components must be mounted in a metal cabinet
• Each cabinet must have a ground/potential bonding rail, which is
connected to the cabinet frame at both ends.
• All SIMADYN D subracks must be connected to the
grounding/potential bonding rail through a 6 mm2 cable which should
be as short as possible. The connection via the PE connection of the
power supply is not sufficient.
• Non-damped contactors may not be used in a cabinet with SIMADYN
D components.
• If non-damped contactors are used in a cabinet next to SIMADYN D,
then the cabinets must be separated by a metal partition.
• All of the cabinets associated with multi-motor SIMADYN D drives
must be connected through a potential bonding conductor with at least
a 16 mm 2 cross-section (the customers PE connection is not
sufficient).
• Each cabinet in which SIMADYN D components are installed/mounted
must have a screen rail. Serrated rails are suitable. The screen rail
must be connected directly to the cabinet frame.
• No gas discharge lamps may be used in the cabinet.
• The screens of incoming cables must be connected directly to the
screen rail.
• The cabinets must be designed so that air can circulate freely within
them.
General technical data
1-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 08.2005
1.1.14 Mounting clearances
The following minimum clearances must be maintained if SIMADYN D
subracks are mounted one on top of the other:
(For 2200 × 600 × 600 mm cabinets)
Front view Side view
Access level
EG
> 50 mm > 50 mm > 50 mm
> 50 mm
EG
ZG
Air intake
Discharged
air
Air deflection plate
Air intake
Discharged
air
min.120 mm
min.120 mm
min. 75 mm
General technical data
Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-11
Edition 08.2005
1
1.1.15 Power loss in the cabinet
Different maximum temperature values are obtained for the SIMADYN D
components, depending on the installation type
• open rack
• cabinet with air mesh
• closed cabinet with forced convection
• closed cabinet with heat exchanger
>30mm
1) 2) 3) 4)
Frame / wall
Cabinet (open) with
forced ventilation,
air slots
> 600 cm
Cabinet (closed) with
self-convection and
forced air circulation
Closed cabinet
with heat exchanger
2
The power loss dissipated from a cabinet depends on the cabinet design,
its ambient temperature and the arrangement of the various devices in
the cabinet.
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
W
20
30
40
50
55°C
Power loss
Ambient temperature
1
4
2
3
General technical data
1-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 08.2005
Nominal values for permissible ambient temperatures of a cabinet with
the dimensions 600 mm × 600 mm ×2200 mm as a function of the
installed power loss can be taken from the figure above.
1. Open unit / wall
2. Cabinet with air slots
3. Closed cabinet with self-convection and forced air circulation using an
equipment fan
4. Closed cabinet with heat exchanger
If a cabinet is ventilated from below via the cable duct, more favorable
conditions are obtained as illustrated under 2).
For mounting types 1) and 2), it is assumed, that there is a minimum of
1m clearance between the cabinet and the ceiling.
1.1.16 Power supply
The following instructions to suppress noise in systems/plants must be
observed so that noise voltage spikes on the supply cable in the cabinet
are eliminated.
Suppressing supply cables
When the equipment is supplied from a 115/230 V supply, a line filter
must be installed in the cable as close as possible to where the cable
enters the cabinet (e. g. 250 V AC/ 10 A). The ground connection of the
line filter must be connected to the central grounding point in the cabinet
through the shortest possible path.
Discharge capacitors for DC supplies
If a cabinet is connected to a central 24 V supply, noise voltages can be
coupled-into the cabinet via the supply cable.
We recommend that noise suppression capacitors are installed where
the 24 V supply cable enters the cabinet. These capacitors can be
mounted on the cabinet ground or the screen rail.
If several 24 V power supplies are used in networked systems, then the
grounds of the power supplies must be connected with on another via the
grounding / potential bonding rail and connected to the subrack.
In order to diminish the effects of noise and disturbances, a line filter
should be provided for the 24V DC power supply of the digital inputs and
outputs ( e.g. line filter SIFI-B, Order No. B84112-B-.... from Epcos / line
filter NF 1-1 from Phönix Contact ). This should be located as close as
possible to the terminal block. The shield connection of the line filter must
be connected to ground through the shortest possible distance.
!
WARNING Protective separation in accordance with VDE 0160 must be
guaranteed for all power supply units which are used to supply
SIMADYN D units and modules.
Measures against
noise voltages
General technical data
Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-13
Edition 08.2005
1
Power supply potentials
For SIMADYN D, the grounds of all secondary voltages must be
connected together and connected to the subrack housing and grounded;
this enhances the discharge of noise signals and voltages.
230/115 V AC
24 V DC
PE
Housing
+ 5 V
+ 15 V
- 15 V
Ground
Using clocked power supplies
If a clocked power supply is used for the 24V supply, the rated output of
the clocked power supply units must be designed for the inrush current of
SIMADYN D (the factor is 200 % of the rated current). Otherwise, the
clocked power supply can ramp-up along the short-circuit current limiting
and undefined conditions can occur.
1.1.17 Subracks
• The subracks must be connected to the grounding/potential bonding
rail using the shortest possible 6mm2 cable.
• All of the boards must be screwed into subracks. This is also required
during the commissioning phase!
• Empty slots must be provided with SIMADYN D slot covers.
• If modules are inserted in an adapter during the commissioning
phase, the front panel must be electrically connected to the housing
through the shortest possible path.
• Modules may neither be removed nor inserted under voltage.
• The connectors for serial interfaces must be screwed to the front
panel.
• The maximum temperature of the air drawn-in by the subrack is 55ºC.
The subrack must be mounted so that air can freely circulate. It must
be ensured that heat cannot build-up (no hotspots).
• The air drawn-in by the subrack must be as dust-free as possible.
General technical data
1-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 08.2005
1.1.18 Cables
Cables from the outside (e. g. to the terminal modules) may not be routed
in a common cable duct with internal cables in the cabinet.
For incoming screened cables (analog and binary), the screen must be
connected to the screen rail where the cable enters the cabinet. The
cable must then be routed, still screened up to the terminal
module/module. Screens are not connected to terminal
modules/modules.
Serial connecting cables must be screened. The screen must be
connected to a metallized connector housing. Further, it must also be
connected to the screen rail. The cable screen may not be connected to
pin 1 of the connector.
Screening using just the front panels of the modules is not effective
The screen cables must be connected at both ends to the screen rails in
the cabinets.
All analog signal cables must be screened, both in the cabinet as well as
outside the cabinet.
Single-ended grounding of cable screens
For analog signal cables, which only conduct low signal levels
(mV or μA), the cable screen is connected to the cable rail at one side in
the cabinet.
All of the signal cables must be provided with screen.
Module Cable length, screened
Outputs 1000 m
Inputs, 230 V AC 1000 m
Inputs, 24...60 V DC 1000 m
Below 500 V AC, a minimum clearance of > 10 cm must be maintained
between signal cables and power cables; for power cables above 1 kV
AC, a clearance > 30 cm must be maintained.
1.1.19 Mounting SIMADYN D unit in drive converters
When mounting SIMADYN D modules in drive converters, the following
should be observed:
• The tachometer cables of the pulse encoders should have double
screens for lengths >10m.
• Only terminal modules and cables in the SIMADYN D program may
be used.
• All cable screens must be connected through the largest possible
surface area to the screen rail. The screen rail must be grounded
using the shortest possible 10mm2 cable.
Screening,
permissible cable
lengths
General technical data
Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-15
Edition 08.2005
1
• Avoid installing the drive converters close to radio transmitter
antennas
• The drive converters must always be mounted in enclosed metal
cabinets.
1.2 ESD guidelines
1.2.1 What is ESD?
Almost all of the SIMADYN D modules have highly-integrated devices.
These devices are, from their very nature, extremely sensitive to
overvoltage conditions, and therefore also to electrostatic discharge.
The abbreviation stands for electrostatic discharge
ATTENTION ACHTUNG
Observe Precautions
for Handling Nur geschultes Personal
darf die Verpackung öffnen
Electrostatic Sensitive
Devices (ESD)
Elektrostatisch gefährdete
Bauelemente (EGB)
ORIGINAL PACKING
Modules, which use these devices have the following warning label on
the component side:
Electrostatic sensitive devices can be destroyed by voltage- and energy
level which lie far below the perception levels of human beings.
Voltages such as these occur when personnel touch a component or a
module without having first being previously electrostatically discharged.
Components, which have been subject to such overvoltage conditions,
can generally not be immediately identified as being faulty, as this is only
manifested after a somewhat longer operating time.
1.2.2 Handling ESD modules
• As a general rule, electronic modules should only be touched if this is
absolutely necessary.
• Components may only be touched if the person
− is continuously grounded through an ESD bracelet, or
− is wearing ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips.
ESD
General technical data
1-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 08.2005
• Before touching an electronics module, you must electrically
discharge your body. This can be simply done by touching a
conductive, grounded object immediately beforehand (e. g. bare metal
cabinet parts, water pipe etc.)
• Modules may not come into contact with highly insulating materials
which can be statically charged. This includes plastic foils, insulating
desktops, clothing manufactured out of man-made fibers.
• Modules may only be placed down on conductive surfaces (desktop
with ESD surface, conductive ESD foam rubber, ESD packing bags,
ESD transport containers, cardboard- or paper surfaces).
• Modules may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or
television sets.
1.2.3 Measuring and making changes on ESD modules
• It only permissible to make measurements at the modules, if
− the measuring unit is grounded (e. g. via protective conductor) or
− before making measurements with an electrically-isolated
measuring device, the probe is briefly discharged (for example by
touching a bare metal control housing).
When carrying-out soldering work on modules, ESD soldering irons must
be used or at least the soldering iron tip grounded.
General technical data
Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-17
Edition 08.2005
1
1.2.4 Transporting modules
Modules and components may only be stored and transported in
conductive packing materials (e. g. metallized plastic boxes, metal
containers).
If the packaging is not conductive, then the modules must first be
wrapped in conductive packaging materials. This can include, for
example conductive foam rubber or normal household aluminum foil.
The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly shown in the
following diagram.
a = conductive flooring surface
d = ESD coat/jacket
b = ESD desk = ESD chain
c = ESD shoes
f = grounding connection for the cabinets
General technical data
1-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 08.2005
1.3 Ambient conditions
The following safety regulations must
be applied:
VDE 0160
Electric power equipment with
electronic devices
Data for „Protective separation“ of
115/230 V AC power supply parts with
respect to PELV circuits
Data for „Protective separation“ of 25V
AC/ 60V DC signal voltages with
respect to PELV circuits
VDE 0106 Part 1
Data regarding shock protection
Protective class according to VDE
0106 Part
I (with protective conductor) for
115/230V supply voltage
II (safety extra-low voltage) for 24V
supply („protective separation“)
Air intake temperature for self- or
forced cooling
It should be observed whether the
module is designed for natural air
cooling or forced ventilation
0 degrees C up to + 55 degrees C
Storage temperature -25 degrees C up to +70 degrees C
Mechanical specifications:
Testing in accordance with SN 29050
in operation Severity grade, class 12
during transport Severity grade, class 22
certification Manufacturers certification for EMC (in
accordance with the EC Directive)
Subracks
2-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
2.1 Subracks SR6, SR6V
The subracks accommodate SIMADYN D modules with the format (HD)
233.4 220 mm².
An integrated power supply provides the necessary voltages for the modules
via the backplane bus (L bus) and permits data transfer between them.
SR6/SR6V: 6
The slots are identified by a labeling strip.
2.1.1 Power supply
The power supply (type SP7, 6DD1683-0BB0) plugs into the SIMADYN D
ES 902 C subrack system in the righthand subrack slot.
It is secured using a screw locking so that it cannot slide out and guarantees
natural air cooling (SR6) or unrestricted forced ventilation with mounted fan
(SR6V) of the subrack.
The current demand of the modules may not exceed the available output
currents of the 5 V and +/-15 V supplies (refer to the Chapter „Technical
data“). Otherwise, a larger subrack must be used, e. g. SR12.x.
green LED green: Error-free operation
red LED: Fault condition
reset button to restart modules
connection for the supply voltage (screw/plug-in terminal X1)
connection for an external back-up battery (screw/plug-in terminal X2)
test sockets to check the 3 output voltages 5 V, +/-15 V
(short-circuit protection is provided via protective resistors)
The 230 V supply voltage is fed-in via the 4-pole screw/plug-in terminal X1.
The connection assignment is printed on the front panel:
Connector X1, Pin Significance
1 L phase conductor
2 N neutral conductor
3 Not connected
4 PE protective conductor
Description
No. of slots
Power
Front panel
elements
Supply connection
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-3
Edition 04.2011
2
NOTES It must be a slightly a
ac
cc
ce
es
ss
si
ib
bl
le
e circuit breaker in the supply circuit.
The connector X1 is not permissible as a circuit breaker.
The connector X1 is permissible only for the internal wiring and may be
plugged only in the voltageless state or be split.
The connector X1 must not be used for a power cable removable of the
terminal user.
The protective conductor must be connected at connector X1, pin 4. It
is not sufficient to connect a protective conductor.
The following fuses are located on the power supply PC board
F 1: T800 mA H 250 V (supply)
F 2: T800 mA H 250 V (supply)
F: T50 mA H
NOTE Caution: bipolar fuse
An external fuse must be dimensioned according to the following operating
data: Input current (at 230 V): In = 600 mA
Fuse link: I²t = 0.5 A²s
Peak inrush current: Is = 25 A
NOTE The power supply PC board is suitable for the connection to IT
systems.
2.1.2 Voltage monitoring functions
The input voltage is monitored for undervoltage and overvoltage conditions.
Input voltage
(Vrated = 1-ph. 230 V AC)
Response
Undervoltage:
< 170 ...175 V
Green OK LED goes dark
The output voltages are shutdown;
CPU stop (DSAVE signal)
The system automatically restarts when
the input voltage increases to approx.
190 V.
Overvoltage
> approx. 265 V
Red fault LED is lit;
The output voltages are shutdown,
CPU stop (DSAVE signal)
No automatic restart (the line supply
voltage must be disconnected)
Fuses
Input voltage
Subracks
2-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
All of the output voltages are monitored for an undervoltage condition
(e. g. as a result of overload/short-circuit).
Undervoltages at the output Response
V (5 V) < 4.7 ... 4.85 V
(for t>100-200 µs)
Red fault LED is lit
The output voltages are shutdown
(CPU stop)
No automatic restart (the line supply
voltage must be disconnected)
V (+ 15 V) < approx. 14 V
V (- 15 V) > approx. -14 V
Red fault LED is lit
5V voltage remains
System failure message
The associated module („STOP“ tab) is configured in HWConfig under
„Object properties“ to define how the module behaves when a system failure
message is output (bus signal *RDYIN=low):
Modules can reset their binary and analog outputs
CPU modules can go into the „STOP“ condition („H“)
2.1.3 Battery back-up
The SR6 subrack does not have its own back-up battery.
A back-up battery can be connected at the screw/plug-in terminal X2 to save
configured values (application software) during a power failure (using
function block SAV). The connection assignment is printed on the front
panel:
Connector X2, Pin Designation Comment
1 0 V Battery ground
2 BATAL Battery monitoring („alarm“ for logical 0)
3 Vcc + 3.0 ...4.5 V battery voltage
Current load: Approx. 10 µA depending on the particular CPU module
It is recommended that the battery is changed every year.
When using a Lithium battery, a series resistor of 39 must be provided to
prevent an inadmissibly high charging current when a fault condition
develops (5V of the power supply is applied to the battery via a defective
diode - which could be a potential explosion hazard).
The monitoring CPU module in SR6(V) does not initially identify when there
is no back-up battery or the back-up battery is discharged (no flashing „b“).
Output voltage
System failure
message
Battery connection
External battery
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-5
Edition 04.2011
2
The SE60 interface module (6DD1681-0GA0, information will be provided on
request) includes the battery and supplies a monitoring signal, which is
connected at X2, pin2 „BATAL“. This TTL signal outputs a „0“ when the
battery voltage falls below 3.0 V.
!
WARNING For safety reasons, it is not permissible that lithium batteries are in the
equipment when it is transported unless the battery manufacturer
permits this expressly using an appropriate declaration.
!
DANGER When the equipment is stored and shipped, the batteries must be
individually and separately packed in a non-conductive material.
There is a danger of explosion if they are not correctly handled. We
can accept no liability for incorrectly handled batteries.
Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with national and
European legislation and regulations.
The lithium batteries must be removed from the battery holder
before the subrack or power supply is disposed of.
2.1.4 Backplane bus
All of the inserted modules receive their voltages and exchange data via a
parallel backplane bus (L bus).
The bus uses the daisy chain principle where a CPU module accepts the
token signal and then transfers it to the next CPU module.
Thus, a daisy chain jumper must be inserted in all backplane bus PC board
slots where there is no CPU module (or EPx signal processor module).
If another module is inserted, the jumper is unimportant.
The jumpers must be correctly inserted up to the last (righthand) CPU
module.
A jumper is required if a module is not located at that connector slot!
The two pins to insert the jumpers are located to the right of the backplane
bus connector (96-pin socket connector).
All of the jumpers are inserted when the equipment is shipped.
Battery voltage
monitoring
Daisy chain
jumpers
Subracks
2-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
X201 to X206 96-pole socket connector DIN 41612 Type C
Pin No. Row a Row b Row c
1 5V 5V 5V
2 AUX2 AB20 AB22
3 AUX1 AB21 AB23
7 4 +15V +15V +15V
5 AUX0 -15V -15V
6 *LOCK *CSPER *CSINI
7 5VEXT 5VEXT *RSERQ
8 Vcc AB12 AB0
9 *BATAL 0V AB1
10 *DSAD AB13 AB2
11 *DSAVE PLC0 AB3
12 AB19 AB14 AB4
13 *OUTDS PLC1 AB5
14 *RESET AB15 AB6
15 *BHE PLC2 AB7
16 *BRQ AB16 AB8
17 *BGIN PLC3 AB9
18 *BGOUT AB17 AB10
19 *BCLR PLC4 AB11
20 *IR0 AB18 DB0
21 *IR1 0V DB1
22 *IR2 DB11 DB2
23 *IR3 0V DB3
24 *RDYIN DB12 DB4
25 *RDY PRIVAT DB5
26 *WR DB13 DB6
27 *RD 0V DB7
28 CLK DB14 DB8
29 *CLK.M 0V DB9
30 *DEN DB15 DB10
31 *HWE RES SBR
32 DT/*R 0V SBT
2.1.5 Ventilation/cooling
The subrack SR6 is designed for natural air cooling.
The SR6V has a fan on the top panel to operate CPU modules which require
forced ventilation.
The fan has a connecting terminal for its 1-ph. 230 V AC supply voltage. The
fan is not monitored.
Signal assignment,
backplane
connector
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-7
Edition 04.2011
2
The subrack must be able to discharge hot air:
The discharged air may not be restricted by mounted components
When mounting equipment or other components, a minimum clearance
of 60 mm must be maintained above and below the subrack
If the subrack is mounted in a cabinet, the cabinet must have air ventilation
slots. If the cabinet is enclosed, the subrack must be force-ventilated (an
SR6V must be used).
If two subracks are mounted one on top of the other, there must be a
minimum 120 mm clearance between the two subracks, whereby the upper
subrack must be separated from the lower subrack by an air deflection plate.
2.1.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity
The subrack must be connected to the grounding rail via the connecting
studs through a min. 6 mm² cable which should be kept as short as
possible.
Potential bonding using the PE pin of line connector X1 is not sufficient!
All of the cabinets associated with networked SIMADYN D drives must be
connected with one another through a potential bonding conductor
having a minimum cross-section of 16 mm².
Empty slots must be provided with SIMADYN D slot covers (SR81, SR82,
SR83).
All modules must be tightly screwed into the subrack.
No undamped contactors may be used in a cabinet together with
SIMADYN D.
If undamped contactors are mounted in a cabinet next to SIMADYN D,
the cabinets must have a metal partition between them.
The protective contactor is connected at the subrack and at the power
supply. Both components must be at protective conductor potential.
Before removing the power supply, the connecting cables must be
disconnected. The connecting cables must first be disconnected from the
supply so that they are in a no-voltage condition!
The screens of screened cables must be directly connected to the
grounding- or screen rails and fed to the interface modules, still
screened.
NOTE
A
dditional information regarding EMC and the ambient conditions, refer
to the Section „General technical data“!
Discharged air
EMC
Subracks
2-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
2.1.7 Technical data
AC power supply according to DIN IEC 38
Input voltage Vin 230 V (+ 10% / - 15%)
Input frequency 47.5 ... 62.5 Hz
Non-periodic overvoltages according to DIN VDE160, A5.3.1.1.2
Voltage 460 V
Duration 1.3 ms
Recovery time, min 0.1 s
Events per hour max. 10
Brief voltage dips according to DIN VDE 0160, A5.3.1.1.3
Voltage 0
Duration 5 ms
Recovery time, min 0.1 s
Events per hour max. 10
Output voltage 5 V +5.1 V +/- 0.1 V
Output current 1.5 to 7 A
Ripple < 50 mVpp
Commutating spikes < 5% (of 5V)
Base load 1.5 A
when a CPU module is inserted
Overvoltage protection with suppressor diode
to protect the modules
Stabilization time < 80 ms after Vin= 230 V;
<1 ms
after load step (0.5 ->1)*Irated
Output voltage +15 V +15 V +/- 0.3 V
Output current 0 to 0.7 A
Ripple < 150 mVpp
Base load Guaranteed by an inserted module
which requires this voltage
Input voltages
Output voltages
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-9
Edition 04.2011
2
Output voltage -15 V -15 V +/- 0.3 V
Output current 0 to 0.6 A
Ripple < 150 mVpp
Base load Guaranteed by an inserted module
which requires this voltage
Time to establish the output voltages Approx. 200 ms
after the power supply voltage has
been applied
SR6 dimensions in mm
(W x H x D)
225 x 320 x 280
Dimensions of the SP7 power supply
in mm (W x H x D)
45.72 x 233.4 x 220
Weight 4 kg
Radio interference suppression level Limit value class B according to VDE
0871
Ventilation SR6: Natural air cooling
SR6V: Fan on the top panel
Screw/plug-in terminal X1 Phönix,
type MSTB 2.5/4-ST/5,08,
cable cross-section 2.5mm²
Screw/plug-in terminal X2 Phönix,
type MSTB 2.5/3-ST/5,08,
cable cross-section 2.5mm²
General data
Subracks
2-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
2.1.8 Dimension drawings
Cable retention
L-Bus
S01 S02 S06
SIMADYN D
OK
RESET
FAULT
0V +5V
+/- 15V
1 0V
2 BATAL
3 VCC
X2
1 L
2 N
3
4 PE
X2
SIEMENS
9,99 cm
Explanation: Subrack SR6
(front view)
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-11
Edition 04.2011
2
+
+
++
+
+
L bus
Subrack SR6 (side view)
Subracks
2-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-13
Edition 04.2011
2
2.2 Subracks SR12 and SR24
Subracks SR12.x and SR24.x are available for different supply voltages and
with or without fan.
Order No. Supply voltage Fan Power supply
type
SR12.1 6DD1682-0CC0 24 V DC yes SP22
SR12.2 6DD1682-0CD0 24 V DC no SP23
SR12.3 6DD1682-0BC3 115/230 V AC yes SP22.5
SR12.4 6DD1682-0BC4 115/230 V AC no SP23.5
SR24.1 6DD1682-0BC0 24 V DC yes SP8
SR24.2 6DD1682-0BE0 24 V DC no SP9
SR24.3 6DD1682-0CE3 115/230 V AC yes SP8.5
SR24.4 6DD1682-0CE4 115/230 V AC no SP9.5
The subracks accommodate SIMADYN D modules with the format (HT)
233.4 220 mm².
An integrated power supply provides the necessary voltages for the modules
via 2 backplane buses (L bus, C bus) and permits data transfer between
them.
SR12.x: 12
SR24.x: 24
The slots are identified by a labeling strip.
2.2.1 Power supply
The power supply plugs into the SIMADYN D rack.
The power supply has a line filter which limits the radio interference voltage
to limit value class A in accordance with VDE 0871.
Green LED: Error-free operation
Red LED: Fault condition
Compartment for the back-up battery
Supply voltage connection (screw/plug-in terminal X1)
Connection for an external back-up battery via screw/plug-in terminal X3
(this is optional to a back-up battery which can be inserted in the subrack
itself)
Reset (cold restart of the modules) by
Depressing the reset button
Jumpering pins 1 and 2 at connector X4
Order No.
Description
Number of slots
Line filter
Front panel
elements
Subracks
2-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
Test sockets to check the 3 output voltages 5 V, +/-15 V
(short-circuit proof)
The line supply voltage is connected through the 3-pole screw/plug-in
terminal X1.
The connection assignment is printed on the front panel:
Above the voltage selector switch (Slide switch) can be switched to between
an input nominal voltage from 230 V and 115 V.
The in each case valid value becomes visible with transfer of the switch.
SR12.1 and SR12.2
SR24.1 and SR24.2
SR12.3 and SR12.4
SR24.3 and SR24.4
Input voltage 24 V DC 230 V AC (default setting of
voltage selector switch )
115 V AC (change over voltage
selector switch )
X1 Pin 1 +24 V Phase conductor L
X1 Pin 2 Ground (0 V) Neutral conductor N
X1 Pin 3 Protective ground conductor
PE
Protective conductor PE
External fuse
(rating)
For SR12.x:
In = 16 A max..
I²t= 6 A²s
Is = 32 A
(inrush peak)
For SR24.x:
In = 32 A max..
I²t= 10 A²s
Is = 64 A
(inrush peak)
For SR12.x: (AC230V)
In = 1.2 A max..
I²t= 0.6 A²s
Is = 6 A
(inrush peak)
For SR24.x: (AC230V)
In = 2.7 A max..
I²t= 1 A²s
Is = 9 A
(inrush peak)
X2 pins 1 - 4 Monitoring the power supply and fan assembly (relay)
X3 pins 1 - 2 Feed for an external back-up battery
X4 pins 1 - 2 Reset: A reset is initiated by jumpering the contents (optional to
using the reset button)
The specified current In is the current that can occur at a maximum insertion
of the subrack. The power supplies are in part oversized, and have a higher
maximum input current (Chapter: Technical dates).
NOTES The protective conductor must be connected at connector X1, pin 3.
It is not sufficient to connect a protective conductor at the subrack.
It must be a slightly accessible circuit breaker in the supply circuit.
Interface modules with binary output function SB70, SB71 should be
powered-up approximately 200 ms before the modules are powered-up
to prevent power-on effects.
This is achieved by simultaneously powering-up the subrack power
supplies (this requires approximately 200 ms to establish the voltages)
and the interface modules.
Supply connection
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-15
Edition 04.2011
2
There are following fuses on the printed circuit board of the power supplies:
Power supply Fuse Type Voltage rated value
SP22.5/SP23.5 F601 T4A H 250 V
SP8.5 F400 T8A H 250 V
NOTE The power supply PC boards are suitable for the connection to IT
systems.
2.2.2 Voltage monitoring functions
The input voltage is monitored for undervoltage and overvoltage conditions.
Input voltage Response
Undervoltage:
SRx.1/SRx.2: < 20 V
or
SRx.3/SRx.4: < 170 ...175 V
Green OK-LED goes dark
The output voltages are shutdown;
CPU stop (DSAVE signal)
The system automatically restarts when
the input voltage increases to approx.
196 V.
Overvoltage
SRx.1/SRx.2: > 32 V
or
SRx.3/SRx.4: > approx. 265 V
Red fault LED is lit;
The output voltages are shutdown,
CPU stop (DSAVE signal)
Automatic restart
All of the output voltages are monitored for an undervoltage condition (e.g.
as a result of overload/short-circuit)
Undervoltages at the output Response
V (5 V) < 4.7 ... 4.85 V
(for t>100-200 µs)
Red fault LED is lit
The output voltages are shut down;
(CPU stop)
No automatic restart (the line supply
voltage must be disconnected)
V (+ 15 V) < approx. 14 V
V (- 15 V) > approx. -14 V
Red fault is lit
5V voltage remains
System failure message
The associated module (under the „STOP“ tab) is configured in HWConfig
under "object properties" to define how the module behaves when a system
failure message is output (bus signal *RDYIN=low):
Modules can reset their binary and analog outputs
CPU modules can go into the "stop" condition ("H")
Input voltage
Output voltage
System failure
message
Subracks
2-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
2.2.3 Battery back-up
A back-up battery can be installed in the power supply to save configured
values during a power failure (using function block SAV) (nominal voltage,
approx. 3.6 V).
Current load: approx. 10 µA depending on the particular CPU module
It is recommended that the battery is changed every year.
When removing the power supply (the defect, changing the fan) back-up is
no longer possible. If required, the back-up voltage must be provided
through the appropriate contact of the backplane connector.
Lithium battery 3,4 V, 5 Ah
Design C (Baby element)
The monitoring CPU module identifies if there is no back-up battery or if the
back-up battery is discharged (at slot 1; flashing "B").
The battery should be changed with the subrack powered-up to prevent data
loss. If a supply voltage is not available, then a voltage must be applied via
connector X3!
!
WARNING For safety reasons, it is not permissible that lithium batteries are in the
equipment when it is transported unless the battery manufacturer
permits this expressly using an appropriate declaration.
!
DANGER When the equipment is stored and shipped, the batteries must be
individually and separately packed in a non-conductive material.
There is a danger of explosion if they are not correctly handled. We
can accept no liability for incorrectly handled batteries.
Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with national and
European legislation and regulations.
The lithium batteries must be removed from the battery holder
before the subrack or power supply is disposed of.
Battery connection
Battery type
Battery voltage
monitoring
Battery change
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-17
Edition 04.2011
2
2.2.4 Backplane buses
All of the inserted modules receive their voltages and exchange data via 2
parallel backplane buses:
L bus („local bus“, below)
C bus („communications bus“, top)
The bus uses the daisy chain principle where a CPU module accepts the
token signal and then transfers it to the next CPU module.
Thus, a daisy chain jumper must be inserted in all backplane bus PC board
slots where there is no CPU module (or EPx signal processor module).
If another module is inserted, the jumper is unimportant.
The jumper must be correctly inserted up to the last (righthand) CPU
module.
A jumper is required if a module is not located at a connector.
The two pins to insert the jumpers are located to the right of the backplane
bus connector (96-pin socket connector).
All of the jumpers are inserted when the equipment is shipped.
Daisy chain-
jumpers
Subracks
2-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
X101 to X124 96-pole socket connector DIN 41612 Type C (C bus)
X201 to X224 96-pole socket connector DIN 41612 Type C (L bus)
The L- and C buses are essentially assigned the same.
The signals with grey background are only available at the L bus.
Pin No. Row a Row b Row c
1 5V 5V 5V
2 AUX2 AB20 AB22
3 AUX1 AB21 AB23
4 +15V +15V +15V
5 AUX0 -15V -15V
6 *LOCK *CSPER *CSINI
7 5VEXT 5VEXT *RSERQ
8 Vcc AB12 AB0
9 *BATAL 0V AB1
10 *DSAD AB13 AB2
11 *DSAVE PLC0 AB3
12 AB19 AB14 AB4
13 *OUTDS PLC1 AB5
14 *RESET AB15 AB6
15 *BHE PLC2 AB7
16 *BRQ AB16 AB8
17 *BGIN PLC3 AB9
18 *BGOUT AB17 AB10
19 *BCLR PLC4 AB11
20 *IR0 AB18 DB0
21 *IR1 0V DB1
22 *IR2 DB11 DB2
23 *IR3 0V DB3
24 *RDYIN DB12 DB4
25 *RDY PRIVAT DB5
26 *WR DB13 DB6
27 *RD 0V DB7
28 CLK DB14 DB8
29 *CLK.M 0V DB9
30 *DEN DB15 DB10
31 *HWE RES SBR
32 DT/*R 0V SBT
Signal assignment,
backplane
connector
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-19
Edition 04.2011
2
2.2.5 Ventilation/cooling
The power supplies for SR12.1 and SR12.3 have 1 fan.
The power supplies for SR24.1 and SR24.3 have 3 fans.
The subracks do not have an air filter. If a filter is required, this must be
provided at the cabinet.
The fans are monitored by the power supply (fan speed). At power-up, the
monitoring is enabled with a time delay to ensure that the subrack reliably
runs-up.
If a fault condition develops, a message is output via a relay contact
(24 V, 100 mA) at connector X2, pins 3 and 4:
Relay contact closed: Fault-free operation
Relay contact open : Faulted operation;
or the subrack has no fan
!
WARNING The subrack may not be used if the fan has a fault, as reliable
operation of the boards cannot be guaranteed due to the danger of
excessive temperature rise.
It is recommended that the fan is changed after approximately 40,000
operating hours at a 50° C ambient temperature. The power supply must
be removed. The bottom panel is completely changed, together with the
fans.
The battery back-up is interrupted when the fan is changed (refer to the
appropriate section.
The cabinet must have cooling air slots if the subracks are not equipped with
fans.
2.2.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity
Bus PC board
Ground
Permanent
connection
24 V electrical isolation
Power supply SIMADYN D subrack
Fan monitoring
Fan change
Self-convection
Ground
connections
Subracks
2-20 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
The subrack must be connected to the grounding rail via the connecting
studs through a min. 6 mm² cable which should be kept as short as
possible.
Potential bonding using the PE pin of supply connector X1 is not
sufficient!
All of the cabinets associated with networked SIMADYN D drives must be
connected with one another through a potential bonding conductor of at
least 16 mm².
Empty slots must be provided with SIMADYN D slot covers (SR81, SR82,
SR83).
All modules must be screwed into the subrack.
No undamped contactors may be used in a cabinet together with
SIMADYN D.
If undamped contactors are mounted in a cabinet next to SIMADYN D,
the cabinet must have a metal partition between them.
The protective contactor is connected at the subrack and at the power
supply. Both components must be at protective conductor potential.
Before removing the power supply, the connecting cables must be
disconnected. The connecting cables must first be disconnected from the
supply so that they are in a no-voltage condition!
The screens of screen cables must be directly connected to the
grounding- or screen rails and fed to the interface modules, still
screened.
NOTE Additional information regarding EMC and the ambient conditions, refer
to Section „General technical data“!
EMC
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-21
Edition 04.2011
2
2.2.7 Technical data
Supply voltages
24 V DC
SR12.1
SR12.2
DC 24 V
SR24.1
SR24.2
Input voltage range 20 ... 30 V 20 ... 30 V
Input current 16 A 32 A
Non-periodic overvoltages acc. to DIN VDE160, A5.3.1.1.2
Max. voltage 35 V
Duration 500 ms
Recovery time, min. 50 s
Events per hour -
Brief voltage dips acc. to DIN VDE 0160, A5.3.1.1.3
Voltage 0 V
Duration 5 ms
Recovery time, min. 0.1 s
Events per hour max. 10
Connecting voltages
AC 115/230 V
SR12.3
SR12.4
AC 115/230 V
SR24.3
Input voltage range + 10% / - 15% + 10% / - 15%
Input frequency 47.5-62.5 Hz 47.5-62.5 Hz
Input current 4 / 2 A 9 / 4 A
Aperiodic overvoltages acc. to DIN VDE160, A5.3.1.1.2
Max. voltage 460 V
Duration 1.3 ms
Recovery time at least 0.1 s
Events per hour max. 10
Short-term voltage drops acc. to DIN VDE 0160, A5.3.1.1.3
Voltage 0 V
Duration 10 ms
Recovery time at least 10 s
Events per hour -
Input voltages
DC-input
Input voltages
AC-input
Subracks
2-22 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
Output voltage 5 V +5.1 V +/- 0.1 V
Output current SR12: 0 to 26 A
SR24: 0 to 52 A
Ripple < 50 mVpp
Commutating spikes < 5% (of 5V)
Base load Guaranteed when a CPU module is
inserted
Overvoltage protection With suppressor diode,
to protect the modules
Stabilization time < 80 ms after Uin= 230 V;
<1 ms
after a load step (0.5 ->1)*Irated
Output voltage +15 V +15 V +/- 0.3 V
Output current SR12: 0 to 3.3 A
SR24: 0 to 6.5 A
Ripple < 150 mVpp
Base load Guaranteed by an inserted module
which requires this voltage
Output voltage -15 V -15 V +/- 0.3 V
Output current SR12: 0 to 3.0 A
SR24: 0 to 6.0 A
Ripple < 150 mVpp
Base load Guaranteed by an inserted module
which requires this voltage
SR12 SR24
Dimensions in mm
(W x H x D)
298.5 x 508.5 x 320 542 x 508.5 x 320
Weight 10.5 - 11 kg 16.2 - 17.3 kg
Radio interference suppression level Limit value class B acc. to
VDE 0871
Output voltages
General data
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-23
Edition 04.2011
2
2.2.8 Dimension drawings
SI EMENS
BATTERY
3,7V/5Ah
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
++ +
POWER
SUPPLY
OK
FAN
OK
SI MADYN D
1 21 2
230 V AC/ 24 V DC
Cable retention
Protective conductor/
potential bonding
C bus
L bus
S01 S02 S12
12 34
B
A
230 V
110 V
Explanation: Subrack SR12
(Front view)
Subracks
2-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
SI EMENS
BATTERY
3,7V/5Ah
+
++
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
++ +
POWER
SUPPLY
OK
FAN
OK
SI MADYN D
1 21 2
230 V AC/ 24 V DC
Cable retention
Protective conductor/potential bonding M5
C bus
L bus
S01 S02 S24
12 34
B
A
++
+
++
230 V
110 V
Explanation: Subrack SR24 (front view)
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-25
Edition 04.2011
2
+
+
++
+
Cable
duct
L bus
C bus
Power supply
Subracks SR12 and SR24
(
Section A-B
)
Subracks
2-26 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
2.3 Subrack SRT400
Order No. Supply voltage Fan Power supply type
6DD1682-0CG0 AC 115/230 V no Integrated
SRT400 is a compact subrack for open-loop and control tasks that have a
technological orientation.
It is comparable with the electronics box of the SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES. The following boards can be inserted in the SRT400.
up to two T400 technology boards
one T400 and one MASTERDRIVES communications board (e.g. CB1,
ADB, …)
In addition to the T400, no other SIMADYN D boards can be inserted in the
subrack. Using these components, for example, functions can be expanded
at a reasonable price and existing plants/systems modernized.
The drives can be controlled via analog or serial interfaces - such as
Profibus DP, USS or peer- to -peer.
2.3.1 Power supply
The power supply is a plug-in unit and is permanently located in the
righthand slot of the subrack. It is interlocked using screws so that it cannot
slide out. It is self-ventilated.
It cannot be separately ordered.
Green LED: Error-free operation
Connection for the line supply voltage
24V supply for the digital (binary) outputs of the T400
Voltage selector switch (115 V / 230 V)
The incoming line supply voltage 115V/230V is connected through a 3-pin
screw terminal.
The connection assignment is stamped on the front plate:
Line supply
connection
Significance
Protective conductor
L Phase conductor
N Neutral conductor
It is possible to toggle between rated input voltages of 230 V and 115 V
using the voltage selector switch (slide switch).
Order No.
Description
Number of slots
Front panel
elements
Supply connection
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-27
Edition 04.2011
2
The value that has been selected can be seen when the switch is set.
NOTE An isolating device that is easy to access must be provided in the
power circuit.
!
WARNING The protective conductor must be connected at the line supply
connector. It is not sufficient to connect the protective conductor at the
subrack itself.
There are following fuses on the printed circuit board of the power supplies:
F1: T800 mA H 250 V (line supply)
F2: T800 mA H 250 V (line supply)
NOTE Caution: Two-pole fuse
NOTE The power supply PC board is suitable for the connection to IT
systems.
2.3.2 Voltage monitoring functions
The input voltage is monitored for undervoltage conditions.
Input voltage
(Vrated = 1-ph. 230 V AC)
Response
Undervoltage: < 170 V The output voltages are shutdown;
CPU stop (DSAVE signal)
After the power supply voltage has been
shutdown and the input voltage increases to
approx. 195 V, then the system automatically
restarts.
Input voltage
(Vrated = 1-ph. 115 V AC)
Response
Overvoltage < 95 V The output voltages are shutdown;
CPU stop (DSAVE signal)
After the power supply voltage has been
shutdown and the input voltage increases to
approx. 100 V, then the system automatically
restarts.
Undervoltages at the output Response
V (5 V) < 4.7 ... 4.85 V
(for t>100-200 µs)
Green OK-LED goes dark
The output voltages are shutdown
(CPU stop)
The system does not automatically restart (the
line supply voltage must be switched-out)
Fuses
Input voltage
Output voltage
Subracks
2-28 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
2.3.3 Battery back-up
The SRT400 subrack does not have a buffer (back-up) battery.
2.3.4 Backplane bus
The power supply for the boards and the data exchange is realized via the
backplane bus.
2.3.5 Ventilation/cooling
The SRT400 subrack is designed for natural air cooling.
The warm air discharged from the subrack must be able to be dissipated to
the surrounding environment:
Other mounted components may not restrict the hot discharged air
When mounting equipment or other components a minimum clearance of
60 mm must be maintained above and below the subrack
If the subrack is mounted in an electrical cabinet, then the cabinet cooling
must be ensured using ventilation slots.
If two subracks are located one above the other then a minimum clearance
of 120 mm must be maintained between the two subracks; an air deflection
plate must be provided so that the hot discharged air of the lower subrack
does not pass through to the second subrack.
2.3.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity
The subrack must be connected to the grounding rail via the connecting
studs through a min. 6 mm² cable which should be kept as short as
possible.
Potential bonding using the PE pin of supply connector is not sufficient!
All of the cabinets associated with networked SIMADYN D drives must be
connected with one another through a potential bonding conductor of at
least 16 mm².
All modules must be screwed into the subrack.
No undamped contactors may be used in a cabinet together with
SIMADYN D.
If undamped contactors are mounted in a cabinet next to SIMADYN D,
the cabinet must have a metal partition between them.
The protective contactor is connected at the subrack and at the power
supply. Both components must be at protective conductor potential.
Discharged air
EMC
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-29
Edition 04.2011
2
The screens of screen cables must be directly connected to the
grounding- or screen rails and fed to the interface modules, still
screened.
NOTE
A
dditional information regarding EMC and the ambient conditions, refer
to Section „General technical data“!
2.3.7 Technical data
AC power supply according to DIN IEC 38
Supply voltages
(can be set using the voltage selector switch)
AC 115 V AC 230 V
Input voltage range ±10% ±10%
Input frequency 47-63 Hz 47-63 Hz
Input current 0.8 A 0.4 A
Non-periodic overvoltages acc. to DIN VDE160, A5.3.1.1.2
Voltage 460 V
Duration 1.3 ms
Recovery time, min 0.1 s
Events per hour max. 10
Brief voltage dips acc. to DIN VDE 0160, A5.3.1.1.3
Voltage 0 V
Duration 5 ms
Recovery time, min 0.1 s
Events per hour max. 10
Output voltage 5 V +5.1 V +/- 0.1 V
Output current 3 A
Ripple < 50 mVss
Commutating spikes < 5% (of 5V)
Overvoltage protection With suppressor diode,
to protect the modules
Stabilization time < 80 ms after Uin= 230 V;
<1 ms
after a load step (0.5 ->1)*Irated
Output voltage +15 V +15 V +/- 0.3 V
Output current 0 to 0.5 A
Ripple < 150 mVss
Input voltages
Output voltages
Subracks
2-30 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
Output voltage -15 V -15 V +/- 0.3 V
Output current 0 to 0.2 A
Ripple < 150 mVss
Output voltage +24 V +24 V ( 20-30 V)
Output current 0 to 0.6 A
Time that it takes for the output
voltages to establish themselves
Approx. 200 ms after the power
supply voltage has been applied
Dimensions in mm
(W x H x D)
90.5 x 291 x 168.5
Weight 2 kg
Radio interference suppression
level
Limit value class B acc. to
VDE 0871
Ventilation Natural air cooling
Line supply connection
Screw/plug-in terminal 3 pin
Phönix,
type Front 2,5H
cable cross-section max. 2,5mm²
24V output terminal
Screw/plug-in terminal 2 pin
Phönix,
type Front 2,5H
cable cross-section max. 2,5mm²
General data
Subracks
Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-31
Edition 04.2011
2
Dimension drawing
Subracks
2-32 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
CPU module
3-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
3.1 CPU module PM5
6DD1600-0AJ0
The CPU module processes general open- and closed-loop tasks. In
addition to
• max. 8 binary inputs,
it also has the possibility to connect up to
• 2 absolute value encoders
• 2 incremental encoders.
Computational performance: 32 MHz, 32 bit RISC processor
DRAM 4 Mbytes (EDO)
SRAM 64 Kbytes
This CPU module permits fast cycle times of 0.1 ms.
A typical application (e. g. control loop) can be configured in approx. 0.6 ms.
The DRAM contains:
• program code (is loaded and expanded when the memory module is
initialized)
• data memory for the operating system, communications, message buffer,
trace function
If the DRAM is not large enough for complex applications, a PM6 (with
8Mbyte DRAM) must be used.
The buffered SRAM (using either a battery in the subrack or an external
battery) contains the following data, which are to be saved during and after a
power failure:
• operating system error diagnostics („exception buffer“)
• max. 1000 process quantities configured with function block SAV
• data recorded/traced using the message system or trace function
(can be optionally configured on the SRAM)
The program, running on the CPU module, is configured on a PC using
STEP7/HWConfig and CFC. This is then loaded into an MS5 program
memory module (or MS51).
The program memory module is inserted in the module receptacle provided
on the CPU module. The user program can be loaded in 2 ways:
• via an PCMCIA card installed in the PC-programming adapter (offline
loading)
• directly from the PC via a serial communications connection in the
memory module inserted in the CPU module
(online loading)
Order No.
Description
Performance data
DRAM
SRAM, buffered
Programming
CPU module
Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-3
Edition 03.2001
3
The size of the software to be loaded in the memory module (compressed to
approx. 50%) and the size of the available program memory is displayed in
CFC under the following menu item:
Target system \ Load \ Info
The program is loaded in a program memory module
MS5, 2 Mbyte Flash-EPROM, 8 Kbyte EEPROM
MS51, 4 Mbyte Flash-EPROM, 8 Kbyte EEPROM
A MS51 memory module which could be used with the PM5 may only be
used up to approx. 50 % so that the expanded code can be accepted on the
PM5.
An RS 232 interface (V.24) with service protocol DUST1 with 19.2 kbd is
permanently installed in connector X01 (9-pin sub-D socket). It is used to:
• test and commission the user program
(using CFC or "IBS")
• loading the user program from the PC (only in this module)
The connections available at the 10-pin connector X5 (8 signals and
ground) are functionally sub-divided into 2 groups, each with 4 inputs:
Pins Function
1...4 Bin. input 1...4 Absolute value
encoder 1
Incremental encoder 1
5...8 Bin. input 5...8 Absolute value
encoder 2
Incremental encoder 2
A plug-in socket is provided on the PM5 for each of the 6 functions. A
function is not selected by configuring, but by inserting a coded connector
into the associated socket.
The available connections can therefore be used for one of the following
combinations of functions:
• 8 binary inputs or
• 4 binary inputs and 1 absolute value encoder or
• 4 binary inputs and 1 incremental encoder or
• 1 absolute value encoder and 1 incremental encoder or
• 2 absolute value encoders or
• 2 incremental encoders
Program size
MS5, MS51
Serial service
interface
Inputs
Selection
CPU module
3-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
Fig. 3-1 Slots for coding connectors to select the functions for connector X5
(in this case, an absolute value encoder 1 and incremental encoder 2 have been
selected)
NOTE Only one coding connector may be inserted in each socket row (pins
1..4 or pins 5..8). A connection can only be assigned one function.
Uni-polar 15V encoders (HTL) with 2 tracks, displaced through 90°, A, B and
if required zero pulse, can be connected for closed-loop speed- or position
controls.
Encoders with SSI- or EnDat protocol can be connected for positioning
tasks.
The screw terminals for the connections are provided via interface modules
(can be connected using cable SC7):
Interface module Function
SB10
SU10
If at least 1 encoder connection is used (electrical 1:1
connection)
SB60
SB61
Optionally to SB10/SU10, if only binary inputs are used
(with electrical isolation and signal conversion)
Table 3-1 Possible interface modules for PM5
Bin.In1..4 Absolut.1 Increm.1
Bin.In5..8 Absolut.2 Increm.2
Function
Pins 1...4
select one
Function
only!
Function
Pins 5...8
select one
Function
only!
Incremental
encoders
Absolute value
encoder SSI, EnDat
Interface modules
CPU module
Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-5
Edition 03.2001
3
In normal operation, the configured number of the CPU module (1...8) is
displayed. When an error occurs, a letter is displayed, which refers to the
error type.
Possible operating- and error statuses:
Display
Operating- and error statuses
Display
can be
deleted
with key
1...8 Configured number of the CPU module in normal
operation
-
A User error:
with function block USF from the diagnostics event
defined by the user. This has no influence on the
program run.
yes
- Initialization phase
individual initialization steps are displayed with
increasing numbers during the run-up phase
-
. 5V available; no program is being executed -
0 Error during initialization:
the user program does not start if errors occur when
the system is being initialized.
Initialization error due to erroneous or incorrectly
inserted modules for the actual software which has
been configured:
• flashing „0“: Error on this module
• steady „0“: Error on other modules
• continuous: Error when loading the system
software
Start diagnostics at the CPU module, which first
displayed the "0" error message. If you cannot identify
which CPU module was the first to have displayed the
error message, then you should start with that CPU
module which displays a "0" and is inserted farthest to
the left.
no
b Monitoring error
• e.g. missing, discharged buffer battery
• background processing error
• when initializing non-critical error which permits
standard operation to start
yes
C Communications error
erroneous configured communications or connection
no
d • steady "d":
Module is in the STOP mode;
selection in the „Target system/operating mode“
menu;
software is still not being downloaded
• flashing "d":
Data is being downloaded in the STOP mode
is faster than download in the RUN mode
(runs in the background)
no
7-segment display
CPU module
3-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
Display
Operating- and error statuses
Display
can be
deleted
with key
E Task administrator error:
• cycle error
a task was not able to be processed within the
sampling time
• task backup
if the task is not designated as a high-priority task,
and has to be re-started.
• no free local buffer
the data buffer is no longer enabled. Task start is
skipped.
• software watchdog
if the base sampling time is not processed for four
consecutive times. The basic clock timer is re-
initialized with the configured base sampling time
and processing is continued.
yes
H Fatal system error:
hardware or software problem which cause a program
crash:
Display:
• flashing „H“: Fault/error on this module
• steady „H“: Fault/error on another module
no
Additional information
on diagnostics refer to the Manual "SIMADYN D Basis Software for
D7-SYS".
The button has 2 functions:
• Deleting the error display:
By depressing button S1, sporadic errors („E“) or non-critical errors („b“)
appearing in the display can be deleted.
If another error is present, this is displayed after the first has been
acknowledged.
• Binary signal input with function block ASI
Resolution, 0.1 ms;
e. g. to time stamp messages
A plug-in socket for a 28-pin EPLD device is provided on the module
(ALTERA company) so that the user program can be copy-protected
(„Hardlock PAL“).
Using a special function block, this EPLD device can be checked and
program stopped if the code is missing or is incorrect.
Additional information on request.
Button S1
Real-time clock
Software
protection
CPU module
Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-7
Edition 03.2001
3
3.1.1 Supplementary components
• MS5 and MS51 program memory modules
• cable SC57 for PC connection, 9-core, 5 m
• cable SC7 to connect an interface module, 10-core, 2 m
If additional input/output signals and other functions are required, then these
can be implemented by inserting a maximum of 2 expansion modules; the
types are subsequently listed:
• IT41
• IT42
• ITDC
• ITSL
3.1.2 Application information and noise immunity
• operation without fan is possible
• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed
into the subrack
• do not insert or withdraw the module when the subrack is powered-up
For more information regarding EMC and ambient conditions, refer to the
Section „General technical data“
3.1.3 Connector assignments
Pin Designation Comment
2 RxD Receive data
3 TxD Transmit data
5 M Ground
7 RTS Request to send („1“)
Table 3-2 Connector assignment X01
Pin As binary input As absolute value
encoder
(SSI or EnDat)
As incremental encoder
(15V)
1 Binary input 1 SSI1: Data + Encoder 1: Track A
2 Binary input 2 SSI1: Data - Encoder 1: Track B
Other information
Serial interface X01
RS 232
Binary- and
encoder inputs X5
CPU module
3-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
Pin As binary input As absolute value
encoder
(SSI or EnDat)
As incremental encoder
(15V)
3 Binary input 3 SSI1: Clock + Encoder 1: Zero pulse
4 Binary input 4 SSI1: Clock - -
5 Binary input 5 SSI2: Data + Encoder 2: Track A
6 Binary input 6 SSI2: Data - Encoder 2: Track B
7 Binary input 7 SSI2: Clock + Encoder 2: Zero pulse
8 Binary input 8 SSI2: Clock - -
9 + 15 V Encoder power
supply
10 Ground
Table 3-3 Connector assignment X5
3.1.4 Technical data
No. of slots occupied 1
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220
Weight Approx. 0.7 kg
Rated voltage min. max. Typical current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 1200 mA
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 35 mA + encoder load
(max. 100 mA, electronic. limited)
-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 35 mA
24 V (external) 20 V 30 V 100 mA + binary output currents
No. Depending on the selection via coding plug:
0 no coding plug at sockets X5A...
4 coding plug at 1 socket X5A...
8 2 coding plugs at both sockets X5A...
of which, max. 4 are interrupt-capable
Input voltage +24 V rated voltage
for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or binary inputs open-circuit
for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V
Input current
for 0 signal 0 mA
for 1 signal 3 mA typ.
Input delay Max. 20 µs
Electrical isolation No;
only via SB60, SB61 interface modules
General data
Power supply
Binary inputs
CPU module
Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-9
Edition 03.2001
3
3.1.5 Connector assignments
Pin Designation Comment
2 RxD Receive data
3 TxD Transmit data
5 M Ground
7 RTS Request to Send („1“)
Table 3-4 Connector assignment X01
Pin As binary input As absolute value
encoder
(SSI oder EnDat)
As incremental
encoder (15V)
1 binary input 1 Encoder1: Data + Encoder1: Track A
2 binary input 2 Encoder1: Data - Encoder1: Track B
3 binary input 3 Encoder1: Clock + Encoder1: Zero pulse
4 binary input 4 Encoder1: Clock - -
5 binary input 5 Encoder2: Data + Encoder2: Track A
6 binary input 6 Encoder2: Data - Encoder2: Track B
7 binary input 7 Encoder2: Clock + Encoder2: Zero pulse
8 binary input 8 Encoder2: Clock - -
9 + 15 V Encoder power
supply (100 mA current
limited)
10 Ground
Table 3-5 Connector assignment X5
SSI-Protokoll EnDat-Protokoll
Pegel RS 485 RS 485
max. frequence 2 MHz 2 MHz
Data direction unidirectional bidireCtional
Data bits 13 + Parity
25 + Parity
variabel (max. 33)
Codierung Gray
Binär
Gray
Binär
Table 3-6 Specification absolute value encoder
Serial interface X01
RS 232
Binary- and
encoder inputs X5
Specification
absolute value
encoder
CPU module
3-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
3.1.6 Connection diagram
X01
PM5
8 binary inputs BI,
of which 4 are
interrupt-capable
SC57
9pin
10pin
X5
l=5m
( cable 1)
COM1/2
Oper. control
unit
(PC)
SC7
l=2m
each 9 core
SB10
or
SB60
SB61
SU12
8 inputs
(each, 10 core)
Serial
interface
(service)
L
bus
C
bus
2 incremental encoders
2 abs. value encoders
Optional
Fig. 3-2 Connecting cables and interface modules
CPU module
Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-11
Edition 03.2001
3
3.2 CPU module PM6
6DD1600-0AK0
The CPU module processes open- and closed-loop tasks which demand an
extremely high computational performance, or where the program is very
large. They have
• 8 binary inputs,
of which a maximum of 4 can be used to call-up interrupt tasks.
Computational performance: 64/128 MHz, 32/64 bit RISC processor
DRAM 8 MByte (SD), version with 16Mbyte
SRAM 256 KByte
The CPU module permits extremely fast cycle times of 0.1 ms. A typical
application (e.g. control loop) can be configured in approx. 0.5 ms.
The DRAM contains:
• Program code (is loaded and expanded when the memory module is
initialized)
• Data memory for the operating system, communications, message buffer,
trace function
The buffered SRAM (using either a battery in the subrack or an external
battery) contains the following data, which are to be saved during and after a
power failure:
• Operating system error diagnostics ("exception buffer)
• Max. 1000 process quantities, configured with the function block SAV
• Data recorded/traced using the message system or trace function
(can be optionally configured on the SRAM)
The program, running on the CPU module, is configured on a PC using
STEP7/HWConfig and CFC. This is then loaded into an MS5 program
memory module (or MS51).
The program memory module is inserted in the module receptacle provided
on the CPU module. The user program can be loaded in two ways:
• via a PCMCIA card installed in the PC-programming adapter
(offline loading)
• directly from the PC via a serial communications connection in the
memory module inserted in the CPU module
(online loading)
The size of the software to be loaded in the memory module (compressed to
approx. 50% and the size of the available program memory is displayed in
CFC under the following menu item:
Target system \ Load \ Info
Order No.
Description
Performance data
DRAM
SRAM, buffered
Programming
Program size
CPU module
3-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
The program is loaded in a program memory module
• MS5 2 Mbyte Flash-EPROM, 8 Kbyte EEPROM
• MS51 4 Mbyte Flash-EPROM, 8 Kbyte EEPROM
• MS52 8 MByte Flash-EPROM, 8 KByte EEPROM
An RS 232 interface (V.24) with service protocol DUST 1 with 19.2 kbaud is
permanently installed in connector X01 (9-pin sub-D socket). It is used to:
• test and commission the user program (using CFC or "basic IBS")
• loading the user program from the PC (only in this module)
8 binary inputs can be connected at the 10-pin connector X5.
The screw terminals for the binary inputs are available via the interface
modules (can be connected using cable SC7):
Interface module Function
SB10, SU10 Electrical 1:1 connection
SB60, SB61 With electrical isolation (floating) and signal conversion
Table 3-7 Possible interface modules for PM6
MS5, MS51, MS52
Serial service
interface
Binary inputs
Interface modules
CPU module
Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-13
Edition 03.2001
3
In normal operation, the configured number of the CPU module (1...8) is
displayed. When an error occurs, a letter is displayed, which refers to the
error type. Possible operating- and error statuses:
Display
Operating- and error statuses
Display
can be
deleted
with key
1...8 Configured number of the CPU module in normal
operation
-
A User error:
with function block USF from the diagnostics event
defined by the user. This has no influence on the
program run
yes
- Initialization phase
Individual initialization steps are displayed with
increasing numbers during the run-up phase
-
. 5V available; no program is being executed -
0 Error during initialization:
the user program does not start if errors occur when
the system is being initialized.
Initialization error due to erroneous or incorrectly
inserted modules for the actual software which has
been configured:
• flashing „0“: Error on this module
• steady „0“: Error on other modules
• continuous: Error when loading the system
software
Start diagnostics at the CPU module, which first
displayed the "0" error message. If you cannot identify
which CPU module was the first to have displayed the
error message, then you should start with that CPU
module which displays a "0" and is inserted farthest to
the left.
no
b Monitoring error
• e.g. missing, discharged buffer battery
• background processing error
• when initializing non-critical error which permits
standard operation to start
yes
C Erroneous configured communications or connection no
d • steady "d":
Module is in the STOP mode;
selection in the „Target system/operating status“
menu;
software is still not being downloaded
• flashing "d":
Data is being downloaded in the STOP mode
is faster than download in the RUN mode (runs in
the background)
no
E Task administrator error:
• cycle error
a task was not able to be processed within the
yes
7-segment display
CPU module
3-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
Display
Operating- and error statuses
Display
can be
deleted
with key
sampling time
• task backup
if the task is not designated as a high-priority task,
and has to be re-started.
• no free local buffer
the data buffer is no longer enabled. Task start is
skipped.
software watchdog
if the base sampling time is not processed for four
consecutive times. The basic clock timer is re-
initialized with the configured base sampling time and
processing is continued.
H Fatal system error:
hardware or software problem which caused a program
crash:
Display:
• flashing „H“: Fault/error on this module
• steady „H“: Fault/error on another module
no
Additional information
on diagnostics refer to the Manual "SIMADYN D Basis Software for
D7-SYS
The button has 2 functions:
• Deleting the error display:
By depressing button S1, sporadic errors ("E") or non-critical errors ("B")
appearing in the display can be deleted.
If another error is present, this is displayed after the first has been
acknowledged.
• Binary signal input with function block ASI
Resolution 0.1 ms; e.g. to time stamp messages;
An MM3 coupling memory module must be used as time source if the time is
to be backed-up during power failures.
A plug-in socket for a 28-pin EPLD device is provided on the module
(ALTERA company) so that the user program can be copy-protected
(„Hardlock-PAL“).
Using a special function block, this EPLD device can be checked and the
program stopped if the code is missing or is incorrect.
Additional information on request.
Button S1
Real-time clock
Software
protection
CPU module
Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-15
Edition 03.2001
3
3.2.1 Supplementary components
• MS5 and MS51 program memory modules
• Cable SC57 for PC connection, 9-core, 5 m
• Cable SC7 to connect an interface module, 10-core, 2 m
If additional input/output signals and other functions are required, then these
can be implemented by inserting a maximum of 2 expansion modules:
• IT41
• IT42
• ITDC
• ITSL
3.2.2 Application information and noise immunity
• Operation without fan is not possible
• Noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed
into the subrack
• Do not insert or withdraw the module when the subrack is powered-up
For more information regarding EMC and ambient conditions, refer to the
section "General technical data“!
3.2.3 Technical data
Number of slots occupied 1
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220
Weight approx. 0.51 kg
Rated voltage min. max. Typical current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 1700 mA
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 50 mA
-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 30 mA
24 V (external) 20 V 30 V 100 mA + binary output currents
Other information
General data
Power supply
CPU module
3-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
No. 8
of which, max. 4 are interrupt-capable
Input voltage +24 V rated voltage
for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or binary inputs open-circuit
for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V
Input current
for 0 signal 0 mA
for 1 signal 3 mA typ.
Input delay max. 20 µs
Electrical isolation no;
only via SB60, SB61 interface modules
3.2.4 Connection diagram
X01
PM6
8 binary inputs BI,
of which 4 are
interrupt-capable
9 pin
10pin
X5 SC7
l=2m SB10
or
SB60
SB61
SU12
8 BI
(each, 10 core.)
Serial
interface
(service)
L
bus
C
bus
SC57
l=5m
( Cable 1)
COM1/2
Oper. control
unit
(PC)
each 9 core
(Binary inputs)
Fig. 3-3 Connecting cables and interface modules
Binary inputs
CPU module
Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-17
Edition 03.2001
3
3.3 Signal processor module EP3 with IS_x
6DD1645-0AE0
The EP3 module is used for special applications. Especially for fast closed-
loop control and arithmetic operations involving converter-related functions
including the gating unit and fast analog signal processing (digital filter).
The EP3 has a DSP56002 signal processor.
The module is configured in HWConfig (the board is inserted in the
SIMADYN D station).
It includes interfaces to plug-in technology cards IS_1, IS_2 and IS_3, which
can optimally adapt the peripheral hardware to the particular task.
They are also configured in HWConfig
(the module is inserted in the SIMADYN D station).
NOTE You will find a detailed description and technical data on EP3 in the
following documentation
"Hardware description large drives"
Order No.: 6DD2921-0XH10.
Order No.
Description
IS_1, IS_2 and IS_3
CPU module
3-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
Coupling memory module
4-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
4.1 Coupling memory modules MM11, MM3, MM4
MM11: 6DD1611-0AD0
MM3: 6DD1611-0AF0
MM4: 6DD1611-0AG0
A coupling memory module has a data memory (RAM), which is used to
transfer data via the CPU modules. A coupling memory module must always
be used if there is more than one CPU module in a subrack, and if the CPU
modules wish to transfer data within the module. For instance, using
configured „$ connections“, „coupling memory module coupling“ or if several
CPU modules access a CS7 serial interface.
A coupling memory module can be inserted at any slot between the first and
second CPU module.
1st CPU
module
Coupling
memory
module
2nd CPU
module
nth CPU
module
Bus system
MM11 MM3 MM4
Bus connection L bus,
C bus
L bus,
C bus
L bus,
C bus
Memory size 2 * 64 Kbytes 2 * 64 Kbytes 2 * 2 Mbytes
Other functions • System error-
relay;
• Radio clock
System error-relay;
• Data is buffered against power failure using a back-up battery (3.4 V) in
the subrack
• Integrated bus termination for the C bus and L bus
Order No.
Application
Slot
Features
Coupling memory module
Hardware - SIMADYN D 4-3
Edition 03.2001
4
4.1.1 Real-time clock in the MM3 coupling memory module
The MM3 coupling memory module includes, in addition to the buffer
function, also a real-time clock, which can be set and synchronized via a
• DCF-77 radio signal
An additional dual port RAM connected to the L bus provides the clock time
to other functions in the CPU modules (e. g. message system). To realize
this, the MM3 must be configured as real-time source on the 1st CPU
module with function block RTCM.
The clock time (time of day) is buffered by the subrack back-up battery.
An MM3 can be inserted, together with an MM4 in a SIMADYN D subrack
to use the large MM4 memory, and to utilize the buffered real-time clock of
the MM3. In this case, the MM3 can be inserted at any subrack slot. The
MM3 memory is not used.
• 10-digit, 7-segment displays H1 - H10 for
seconds, minutes, hours, months, days
located under one another in pairs
(from top to bottom)
• 2 keys to manually set the clock
• 4 LEDs for status displays
• Screw/plug-in terminal (X5) for system error signal relay:
When a CPU module identifies a fatal error, normal operation is aborted;
the subrack goes into the STOP condition,
the relay opens when an error occurs
• Screw/plug-in terminal (X6) is prepared for IRIG-B audio signal;
this functionality has still not been implemented!
• BNC socket (X7) for DCF-77 antenna connection
• 1 double test socket for the reset signal (X10/X11) to reset the module
(caution: This must only be used for test purposes!)
Data back-up
MM3 + MM4
Front panel
elements
Coupling memory module
4-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
Communi-
cations
buffer L bus
32K X 16
80C186
dual-port
RAM
2K X 8
32K X 16
RDYIN-
relay
Input Output Status-
anzeige
Data- control- and address bus
Time
CPU
7-segment
LED control Coupling memory
module C bus
Clock module
DCF77 receiver
and
IRIG-B converter L bus
C bus
RDYIN
IRIG-B
Fig. 4-1 MM3 block diagram
Note: Led H1 (seconds) is located at the top, H10 (days) at the bottom!
The time is synchronized (time of day setting) via antenna using the DCF-77
radio signal. This signal can be received in Central Europe.
A differentiation is made between the following antennas:
• antenna for inside installation
• antenna for outside installation
The antenna must be aligned so that optimum reception is guaranteed.
Generally, this is towards Frankfurt/Main, where the signal transmitter is
located. The BNC socket X7 at the front panel is used to connect the
antenna.
Radio clock
DCF-77
Coupling memory module
Hardware - SIMADYN D 4-5
Edition 03.2001
4
NOTE The antenna for outdoor installation normally ensures better
reception, as the rooms, in which SIMADYN D is used, are generally
screened and/or can accommodate devices/equipment which emit
noise radiation.
If the time display flashes, then the time hasn’t been set after power-up
(voltage on).
The clock can be set in 3 different ways:
• using the DCF-77 radio signal:
The clock is set using the antenna signal when the appropriate data is
configured at the IS input of function block RTCM, an antenna is
connected and the reception conditions are OK (refer below).
The complete time of day is received after approximately 2 minutes as a
result of the telegram data transfer time of the DCF-77. The clock display
flashes for this time after power-up.
• when the signal at input IS changes from 0 to 1 at function block RTCM,
the time of day, available at its connections, is transferred.
• the time of day can always be manually set using two keys:
− using upper key S1, all numerical pairs (digit pairs) of the 7-segment
display are selected one after the other. They flash after they have
been selected.
− using lower key S2, a „1“ is added to the value in the flashing display,
each time the key is depressed. When seconds is selected the value
is set to zero.
− after the seconds display has been selected, the next time that S1 is
depressed, the year is displayed on the two upper digit pairs (H1, H2)
- the year - can be set.
− after all of the digit pairs have been selected, the next time that S1 is
depressed, the setting mode is exited. The display stops flashing.
Time displayRadio
clock DCF-77:Time
display
Setting the clock
time
Coupling memory module
4-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
LEDs H20 to H23 are loaded on the front panel. They indicate the status of
the clock receiver (time of day receiver).
LED Color Function Description
H20 Green Lit The module has been
initialized to receive
the DCF77 signal
Dark The module has been
initialized to receive
the IRIG-B signal
H21 Red Flashes in a
second rhythm
The time signal is
received
Lit The signal does not
contain information -
check the signal cable!
H22 Green Dark The time signal
contains incorrect
information
Lit The information is
received for at least 10
seconds in the correct
format
H23 Red Lit Time telegram error
Dark Decoding running
Order designation Supplier
FG443610 antenna for indoor
installation 4436
(long distance)
Hopf Elektronik
Nottebohmstr. 41
58511 Lüdenscheid
FG441800 antenna for outdoor
installation 4418
Receive status
Ordering data,
radio clock
antenna
Coupling memory module
Hardware - SIMADYN D 4-7
Edition 03.2001
4
4.1.2 Technical data MM11, MM3, MM4
No. of slots occupied 1
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220
Weight MM11: Approx. 0.51 kg
MM3: 0.7 kg
MM4: 0.5 kg
Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V MM11: 300 mA
MM3: 600 mA
MM4: 800 mA
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V MM3: 50 mA
Back-up battery 2.2 V 3.9 V 20 µA
RDYIN signal output for MM3 and MM4:
Description Values
Voltage max. 60 V DC
Switching current max. 0,5 A
NC contact interrupt time 100 ms
Switching power max. 20 W
General data
Power supply
voltage
System error
relay
Coupling memory module
4-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
Input/output modules
5-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.1 Input/output modules EA12
6DD1642-0BC0
• 8 analog outputs
• 20-pin connector for the analog outputs
• 8 test socket pairs (2.3 mm) on the front panel to connect measuring
equipment (for start-up)
• L bus connection
An analog output (signal at the connector and interface module and at the
test socket) can be loaded up to 10 mA and is short-circuit proof for 2 min.
The manufacturer adjusts the outputs as far as offset and gain are
concerned for an ambient temperature of approximately 20° C:
This adjustment is made using 2 potentiometers for each output, which are
not sealed so that they can be re-adjusted in operation (e. g. due to different
ambient temperatures).
The temperature dependency is max. approx. +/-240 µV at a temperature
change of +/-1° C.
Analog output Offset Gain
Output 1 -R49 -R46
Output 2 -R55 -R52
Output 3 -R61 -R58
Output 4 -R67 -R64
Output 5 -R73 -R70
Output 6 -R79 -R76
Output 7 -R85 -R82
Output 8 -R91 -R88
Table 5-1 Adjustment potentiometers for analog outputs
The module should be operated for approx. 2 min before any adjustment is
made so that it has time to reach its operating temperature.
The offset adjustment is first made. The value 0.0 (0%) should be output in
the configured software at the connection of the associated function block,
and the associated offset potentiometer should be adjusted until 0 V is
measured.
The output voltage is increased by rotating the potentiometer clockwise.
The gain is then adjusted. The associated analog output should be driven
with 2.0 (200%) (configured software) and the associated offset
potentiometer should be adjusted until 10 V is measured.
The switch-mode power supply causes voltage spikes (these can be
measured up to 100 mV) on the ground cable. They can be suppressed by:
• smoothing at the load input
• low-ohmic load
5.1.1 Supplementary components
All of the cables for the output signals are not directly connected at the
module, but via interface modules. The interface modules serve as
mechanical connecting element (screw/plug-in terminals) and toelectrically
adapt the system/plant signals (optional).
Order No.
Features
Load capability
Adjustment,
temperature
Adjustment
Noise signals at
the outputs
Interface modules
with terminals
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-3
Edition 12.2004
5
Interface
module
Function
SU11 20 signals can be directly connected, no signal conversion
Table 5-2 Interface modules which can be connected at the module
• The module is connected to the interface modules using matching plug-in
cables:
• SC12 to connect an SU11
Cables
Input/output modules
5-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.1.2 Connector assignment X5
EA12
X5
Significance Associated
test socket
SU11
Connector
designation when
configuring
1 Analog output 1 X11 SIG 1 X5A
2 Ground X11 COM 2
3 Analog output 2 X12 SIG 3 X5B
4 Ground X12 COM 4
5 Analog output 3 X13 SIG 5 X5C
6 Ground X13 COM 6
7 Analog output 4 X14 SIG 7 X5D
8 Ground X14 COM 8
9 Analog output 5 X15 SIG 9 X5E
10 Ground X15 COM 10
11 Analog output 6 X16 SIG 11 X5F
12 Ground X16 COM 12
13 Analog output 7 X17 SIG 13 X5G
14 Ground X17 COM 14
15 Analog output 8 X18 SIG 15 X5H
16 Ground X18 COM 16
17 Electronics ground
(connected with the
electronics ground via 0
Ohm resistor)
--- 17
18 Electronics ground
(connected with the
electronics ground via 0
Ohm resistor)
--- 18
19 Ground --- 19
20 Ground --- 20
Table 5-3 EA12 connector- and SU11 terminal assignment
All of the "ground" terminals are connected together via 0 Ohm resistors
and are connected to electronics ground via an associated inductance.
5.1.3 Application information and noise immunity
• operation without fan is possible
• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed
into the subrack
The input/output signals must be screened on the plant/system side. The
screen must be connected through the largest possible surface area to the
screen rail between the interface module and where the cable enters or exits
the cabinet.
SU11 terminal
assignment
Screening
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-5
Edition 12.2004
5
The front panel and if relevant, a connector housing, initially have no contact
to the electronics ground of the module. The front panel is only connected to
the electronics ground of the module via the backplane bus connector (L/C
bus connection) and a cable connection, which can be released, between
the backplane bus and the subrack housing.
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
"General technical data"
5.1.4 Technical data
No. of slots occupied 1
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220
Weight Approx. 0.5 kg
Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 600 mA
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 200 mA
-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 200 mA
No. 8
Output voltage, min. - 10 V
Output voltage, max. + 10 V
Output current +/- 10 mA max.
Output current (at +/- 10 V) +/- 5 mA
(recommended to suppress noise)
Resolution 13 bits + sign (corresponds to 1 mV)
Accuracy 14 bits (corresponds to 1 mV)
Short-circuit protection to ground With 56 Ohm resistor
Short-circuit duration 120 s
Total load All outputs simultaneously, each 10 mA
Temperature dependency Max. 240 μV/degrees
Error
absolute linearity +/-0.6 mV
differential linearity +/- 1 mV
monotony 14 bits (corresponds to 1 mV)
Ground
connections
Other information
General data
Power supply
Analog outputs
Input/output modules
5-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.1.5 Connecting diagram
L
bus
EA12
X5
20pin
SC12
SU11
l=2m 8 A
O
8 analog outp. AO
Fig. 5-1 Connecting cables and interface modules
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-7
Edition 12.2004
5
5.2 Input/output module EB11
6DD1641-0AC0
• 32 binary inputs and outputs
• 2 40-pin connectors
• 2*8 binary inputs and outputs per connector
• binary outputs with thermal overload protection
• 2 LED keys to reset after an overload condition
• L-bus connection
An overloaded binary output due to an excessively high current (thermal
overload, e. g. short-circuit) is electronically shutdown. The output is
switched into an open-circuit condition. The LED key of the associated
connector lights-up.
The associated output is operational again after a recovery time (during
which time it cools-down). To realize this, the associated electronics must be
reset; this can be done in 2 ways:
• Using the background program of the CPU module, on which the
associated binary output function block is configured.
For a normal CPU utilization, this reset takes several seconds after
cooling-down.
Resetting can take somewhat longer for extremely high CPU loading
levels.
• By depressing the illuminated LED key.
Key assignment:
− connector X5: Key S1
− connector X6: Key S2
Order No.
Features
Overload
protection
Input/output modules
5-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.2.1 Supplementary components
All of the cables for the input / output signals are not directly connected to
the module, but via interface modules. The interface modules are used as
mechanical connecting element (screw/plug-in terminals) and also to
electrically adapt the plant/system signals and convert them (optional).
Interface
module
Function
SB10 Direct connection (1:1 connection)
of 8 binary inputs/outputs, LED, no signal conversion
SB60 8 binary inputs, converted from 230V to 24V (module signal
level), LED, electrically isolated (floating)
SB61 8 binary inputs, converted from 48V to 24V, LED, electrically
isolated (floating)
SB70 8 binary outputs, converted from 24V to 230V (changeover
relay), LED, electrically isolated (floating)
SB71 8 binary outputs, converted from 25V to 48V (transistor)
SU11 20 signals are directly connected, no signal conversion
SU12 10 signals are directly connected, no signal conversion
Table 5-4 Interface modules which can be connected to the module
The module is connected to the interface modules using the matching plug-
in cables. A plug-in cable has several cable ends to connect several
interface modules:
• SC13 to connect 4 interface modules (SBxx, SU12)
• SC55 to connect 2 SU11
Depending on the required function (signal conversion, LED display),
different interface modules can be connected at the binary inputs and
outputs. If interface modules with signal conversion are used, the SC13
cable must be selected:
Cable SC55
max. 2 interface modules, type
SC13 cable
max. 4 interface modules, type
SU11
(20 screw terminals,
no signal conversion)
SB10
SB60
SB61
SB70
SB71
SU12
Table 5-5 Cable and interface modules which can be connected to EB11, connectors X5, X6
Interface modules
with terminals
Cables
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-9
Edition 12.2004
5
5.2.2 Connector- and terminal assignment
5.2.2.1 Terminal assignment for SC55
EB11
X5,
X6
Significance SU11
at SC55,
cable end
A
Connector
designation when
configuring
1 Binary output 1 1
2 Binary output 2 2
3 Binary output 3 3
4 Binary output 4 4
5 Binary output 5 5 X5A
6 Binary output 6 6 X6A
7 Binary output 7 7
8 Binary output 8 8
9 External 24 V 9
10 External ground 10
11 Binary output 9 11
12 Binary output 10 12
13 Binary output 11 13
14 Binary output 12 14
15 Binary output 13 15 X5B
16 Binary output 14 16 X6B
17 Binary output 15 17
18 Binary output 16 18
19 External 24 V 19
20 External ground 20
Table 5-6 SU11 terminal assignment for SC55, cable end A
SU11 terminal
assignment at
SC55, end A
Input/output modules
5-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
EB11
X5,
X6
Significance SU11
at SC55,
cable end
B
Connector
designation when
configuring
1 Binary input 1 1
2 Binary input 2 2
3 Binary input 3 3
4 Binary input 4 4 X5C
5 Binary input 5 5 X6C
6 Binary input 6 6
7 Binary input 7 7
8 Binary input 8 8
9 External 24 V 9
10 External ground 10
11 Binary input 9 11
12 Binary input 10 12
13 Binary input 11 13
14 Binary input 12 14
15 Binary input 13 15 X5D
16 Binary input 14 16 X6D
17 Binary input 15 17
18 Binary input 16 18
19 External 24 V 19
20 External ground 20
Table 5-7 SU11 terminal assignment for SC55, cable end B
SU11 terminal
assignment at
SC55, end B
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-11
Edition 12.2004
5
5.2.2.2 Terminal assignment for SC13
At the particular cable ends, only certain signal types are available, where
only the correct interface modules can be used:
Interface
module
Screw
terminal
(x=1...8)
Significance
SB10
x
5x
1:1 screw terminal
Signal
Reference potential (ground or P24)
SB60
x1
x2
x4
Binary inputs 115/230 V
Ground
Binary input 115 V
Binary input 230 V
SB61
x
1x
5x
Binary inputs 24/48 V
Binary input 24 V
Binary input 48 V
Reference
SB70
x1
x2
x4
Binary outputs (relay)
Common (center contact)
NC contact
NO contact
SB71
x
5x
Binary outputs (transistor)
Signal
Ground
Table 5-8 Terminal assignment, interface module
Terminal
assignment,
interface module
Input/output modules
5-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
EB11
X5,X6
Significance SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
1 Binary output 1 1 1/51 12/11/1
4
1/51
2 Binary output 2 2 2/52 22/21/2
4
2/52
3 Binary output 3 3 3/53 32/31/3
4
3/53
4 Binary output 4 4 4/54 42/41/4
4
4/54
5 Binary output 5 5 5/55 52/51/5
4
5/55
6 Binary output 6 6 6/56 62/61/6
4
6/56
7 Binary output 7 7 7/57 72/71/7
4
7/57
8 Binary output 8 8 8/58 81/82/8
4
8/58
9 External 24 V 9 1P 1P 1P
10 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M
Table 5-9 Terminal assignment, interface modules at SC13, cable end A
EB11
X5,X6
Significance SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
1 Binary output 1 1 1/51 12/11/1
4
1/51
2 Binary output 2 2 2/52 22/21/2
4
2/52
3 Binary output 3 3 3/53 32/31/3
4
3/53
4 Binary output 4 4 4/54 42/41/4
4
4/54
5 Binary output 5 5 5/55 52/51/5
4
5/55
6 Binary output 6 6 6/56 62/61/6
4
6/56
7 Binary output 7 7 7/57 72/71/7
4
7/57
8 Binary output 8 8 8/58 81/82/8
4
8/58
9 External 24 V
9 1P 1P 1P
10 External ground
10 1M 1M 1M
Table 5-10 Terminal assignment, interface modules at SC13, cable end B
Terminal
assignment at
SC13, end A
Terminal
assignment at
SC13, end B
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-13
Edition 12.2004
5
EB11
X5,X6
Significance SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
21 Binary input 1 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51
22 Binary input 2 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52
23 Binary input 3 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53
24 Binary input 4 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54
25 Binary input 5 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55
26 Binary input 6 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56
27 Binary input 7 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57
28 Binary input 8 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58
29 External 24 V 9 1P 1P 1P
30 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M
Table 5-11 Terminal assignment, interface modules at SC13, cable end C
EB11
X5,X6
Significance SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
31 Binary input 9 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51
32 Binary input 10 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52
33 Binary input 11 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53
34 Binary input 12 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54
35 Binary input 13 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55
36 Binary input 14 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56
37 Binary input 15 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57
38 Binary input 16 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58
39 External 24 V 9 1P 1P 1P
40 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M
Table 5-12 Terminal assignment, interface modules at SC13, cable end D
5.2.3 Application information and noise immunity
• operation without fan is possible
• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed
into the subrack
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
"General technical data"
Terminal
assignment at
SC13, end C
Terminal
assignment at
SC13, end D
Other information
Input/output modules
5-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.2.4 Technical data
No. of slots occupied 1
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220
Weight Approx. 0.6 kg
Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 420 mA
-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 20 mA (only as reference)
+24V +20 V +30 V 0,2 A (from an external power
supply)
+ current drain of the connected
SB70, SB71 interface modules
+ current drain from the binary
outputs which are directly
connected at the binary outputs of
the connected components (when
using SB10, SU11, SU12)
No. 2 x 16
Input voltage +24 V rated value
for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V; or open-circuit binary inputs
for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V
Input current for an 1 signal 5 mA typ.
Delay time 200 µs
No. 2 x 16
Power supply voltage
rated value +24 V DC
ripple 3.6 V DC
permissible
range
+20 to +30 V, including ripple
briefly +35 V for < 0.5 s
Output current for a 1 signal
rated value 50 mA
permissible
range
0.2 mA to 50 mA
Short-circuit protection Thermal / electronic
Limiting inductive switch-off
voltage
To the supply +1 V
Residual current 20 µA for a 0 signal
Signal level
for 0 signal Max. 3 V
for 1 signal Min. supply - 2.5 V
Delay time 15 µs
General data
Power supply
Binary inputs
Binary outputs
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-15
Edition 12.2004
5
5.2.5 Connecting diagram
L
bus
X6
EB11
40pin
2*8 binary outp. BO
2*8 binary inp. BI
8 BO 8 BI8 BO 8 BI
SC13
A B C D
or
SB10
or
SB60
SB61
SU12
SB10
or
SB70
SB71
SU12
SB10
or
SB70
SB71
SU12
SB10
or
SB60
SB61
SU12
l=4*2m
A
SC55
8 BO
B
8 BI
8 BO
SU11 SU11
l=2*2m
(each,
10core
)
8 BI
(each, 20core)
X5
40pin
2*8 binary outp. BO
2*8 binary inp. BI
8 BO 8 BI8 BO 8 BI
SC13
A B C D
or
SB10
or
SB60
SB61
SU12
SB10
or
SB70
SB71
SU12
SB10
or
SB70
SB71
SU12
SB10
or
SB60
SB61
SU12
l=4*2m
A
SC55
8 BO
B
8 BI
8 BO
SU11 SU11
l=2*2m
(each,
10core)
8 BI
(each, 20core)
Fig. 5-2 Connecting cables and interface modules
Input/output modules
5-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.3 Expansion module IT41
6DD1606-3AC0
The IT41 expansion module provides
incremental encoder inputs and
analog and binary inputs and outputs
The expansion module is inserted on a CPU module (PM5, PM6). A
maximum of 2 expansion modules ITxx can be inserted on a CPU module.
An ITxx occupies 1 slot (in addition to the mounting slot of the CPU module
itself).
• 4 analog outputs
• 4 analog inputs
• 16 binary outputs
• 16 binary inputs
• 4 incremental encoders with monitoring tracks
• 1 alarm (interrupt) input for each incremental encoder
• 1 alarm (interrupt) reset output for each incremental encoder
Pulse
sensing 1/2
Pulse
sensing 3/4
T filter
Driver
50 mA- driver
Latch
Monitoring inputs,
alarm identification,
alarm reset
DA
DA
DA
DA
Dual
port
RAM
IT41
controller
Local expansion bus
P5 M P15 N15
Analog
outputs
Analog
inputs
16 binary inputs
16 binary outputs
Pulse/sony
encoder
inputs
Electrical isolation
Changeov.
switch
Changeov.
switch
Changeov.
switch
Changeov.
switch
Monitoring inputs
and outputs for
4 encoders
D
A
M
U
X
+
Fig. 5-3 Block diagram of IT41
Order No.
Description
Inputs and outputs
Block diagram
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-17
Edition 12.2004
5
Incremental encoders can be connected to IT41, with:
• 2 tracks, displaced through 90º, A, B and if required zero pulse
• separate pulses for forwards- and reverse pulses,
e. g. Sony encoders
The selection is configured at the speed actual value function block.
Incremental encoders with the following signal voltages can be connected to
IT41
• 15V
• 5V (also as push-pull signals or RS485 differential signals)
Incremental
encoder types
Selecting the
encoder signal
voltage
Input/output modules
5-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
The signal voltage is selected, i. e. the associated receive driver is
connected by inserting 2 coding plugs, lying one behind the other, into a
certain setting (also refer to the following diagram).
If the coding plug is used so that the closed wire jumper is towards the front
panel of the IT41, then a 5V encoder has been selected.
If the interrupted jumpers point towards the front panel, a 15V encoder has
been selected. This is the factory setting.
NOTE 15V encoders with separate forwards/reverse tracks cannot be used
without any further measures.
(Component side IT41)
.
X100
X200
X300
X400
X101
X201
X301
X401
Configured for 5 V encoders
(e. g. SONY)
Configured for 15 V encoders
X6
X7
Front panel
Fig. 5-4 Assignment of the coding plug for incremental encoders
!
WARNING If coding plugs are incorrectly inserted, the inputs could be destroyed
when pulses are input!
Coding plug
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-19
Edition 12.2004
5
5.3.1 Supplementary components
All of the cables for the input/output signals are not directly connected to the
module, but via interface modules. The interface modules serve as
mechanical connecting element (screw/plug-in terminals) as well as
electrically adapting and converting the plant signals (optional).
Interface
module
Function
SB10 Direct connection (1:1 connection)
of 8 binary inputs/outputs, LED, no signal conversion
SB60 8 binary inputs, converted from 230V to 24V (module signal
level), LED, electrical isolation (floating)
SB61 8 binary inputs, converted from 48V to 24V, LED, electrical
isolation (floating)
SB70 8 binary outputs, converted from 24V to 230V (changeover
relay), LED, electrical isolation (floating)
SB71 8 binary outputs, converted from 25V to 48V (transistor)
SU10 25 signals can be directly connected, no signal conversion
SU12 10 signals can be directly connected, no signal conversion
Table 5-13 Interface modules which can be connected to the module
The module is connected to the interface modules using the matching plug-
in cables. Cables for large connectors have several cable ends to which the
appropriate number of matching interface modules can be connected.
Interface modules with or without signal conversion (e. g. signal level
adaption, electrical isolation) and LED display can be used at connectors
with binary inputs and outputs.
The cable selection depends on the interface modules used:
Connector
IT41
Signals Cable Interface module
X6 Incremental encoder
analog outputs
SC49
2 x SU10
X7 Analog inputs
binary inputs/outputs
SC49
or
SC54
2 x SU10
or
5 x SB10
SB60
SB61
SB70
SB71
SU12
Table 5-14 Cables to be used with the various modules
Interface modules
with terminals
Cables
Input/output modules
5-20 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.3.2 Connector assignment X6
Connector X6 (50 pin, sub D) connects signals for
• 4 incremental encoders
• 4 analog outputs
Two SU10 interface modules can be connected via an SC49 plug-in cable
("1:1" connection from the module to terminals):
IT41
X6
Encoder with
tracks displaced through
90º
Encoder
with
forwards/
reverse
tracks
SU 10
at the
cable
end
A
Connector designation
when configuring
1 Track A+ V+ 1
34 Track A- V- 2
18 Encoder
1
Track B+ R+ 3 X6A
2 Track B- R- 4
35 Zero pulse+ - 5
19 Zero pulse- - 6
3 Track A+ V+ 7
36 Track A- V- 8
20 Encoder
2
Track B+ R+ 9 X6B
4 Track B- R- 10
37 Zero pulse+ - 11
21 Zero pulse- - 12
5 Track A+ V+ 13
38 Track A- V- 14
22 Encoder
3
Track B+ R+ 15 X6C
6 Track B- R- 16
39 Zero pulse+ - 17
23 Zero pulse- - 18
7 Track A+ V+ 19
40 Track A- V- 20
24 Encoder
4
Track B+ R+ 21 X6D
8 Track B- R- 22
41 Zero pulse+ - 23
25 Zero pulse- - 24
9 Encoder power supply
approx. +15 V DC, max. 100 mA
25
Not assigned 26
Table 5-15 Pin assignment IT41, connector X6 and terminal assignment SU10 at SC49,
end A
SU10 encoder
connections at
SC49, end A
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-21
Edition 12.2004
5
IT41
X6
Encoder with
tracks displaced
through 90º
Encoder with
forwards/
reverse
tracks
SU 10
at cable
end
B
Connector
designation
when
configuring
42 Encoder ground 1
26 Encoder ground 2
10 Monitoring input,
encoder 1
3
43 Monitoring input,
encoder 2
4
27 Monitoring input,
encoder 3
5
11 Monitoring input,
encoder 4
6
44 Alarm input 1 7
28 Alarm input 2 8
12 Alarm input 3 9
45 Alarm input 4 10
29 Alarm output 1 11
13 Alarm output 2 12
46 Alarm output 3 13
30 Alarm output 4 14
14 Alarm ground 15
47 Ground (de-coupled) Analog outputs 16
31 Ground (de-coupled) Analog outputs 17
15 Analog output 1 18 X6E
48 Ground 19
32 Analog output 2 20 X6F
16 Ground 21
49 Analog output 3 22 X6G
33 Ground 23
17 Analog output 4 24 X6H
50 Ground 25
Table 5-16 Pin assignment IT41, connector X6 and terminal assignment SU10 at SC49,
end B
SU10 terminal
assignment at
SC49, end B
Input/output modules
5-22 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.3.3 Connector assignment X7
Connector X7 (50 pin, sub D) connects signals for:
• 4 analog inputs
• 2*8 binary inputs and 2*8 binary outputs
Depending on the required function (signal conversion, LED display)
different interface modules can be connected to the binary inputs and
outputs. If interface modules with signal conversion are used, the SC54
cable must be used:
SC49 cable
max. 2 interface modules, type
SC54 cable
max. 5 interface modules, type
SU10
(25 screw terminals,
no signal conversion)
SB10
SB60
SB61
SB70
SB71
SU12
Table 5-17 Cables and interface modules which can be connected at IT41, connector X7
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-23
Edition 12.2004
5
5.3.3.1 Connector assignment X7 for SC49
IT41
X7
Significance SU 10
at SC49,
cable end
A
Connector
designation when
configuring
1 Binary output 1 1
34 Binary output 2 2
18 Binary output 3 3
2 Binary output 4 4
35 Binary output 5 5 X7A
19 Binary output 6 6
3 Binary output 7 7
36 Binary output 8 8
20 External P24 voltage 9
4 External ground 10
37 Binary output 9 11
21 Binary output 10 12
5 Binary output 11 13
38 Binary output 12 14
22 Binary output 13 15 X7B
6 Binary output 14 16
39 Binary output 15 17
23 Binary output 16 18
7 External P24 voltage 19
40 External ground 20
24 Binary input 1 21
8 Binary input 2 22
41 Binary input 3 23 X7C
25 Binary input 4 24
9 Binary input 5 25
Table 5-18 SU10 terminal assignment for SC49, cable end A
SU10 terminal
assignment at
SC49, end A
Input/output modules
5-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
IT41
X7
Significance SU 10
at SC49,
cable end
B
Connector
designation when
configuring
42 Binary input 6 1
26 Binary input 7 2 X7C
10 Binary input 8 3
43 External P24 voltage 4
27 External ground 5
11 Binary input 9 6
44 Binary input 10 7
28 Binary input 11 8
12 Binary input 12 9 X7D
45 Binary input 13 10
29 Binary input 14 11
13 Binary input 15 12
46 Binary input 16 13
30 External P24 voltage 14
14 External ground 15
47 Reference ground for
differential analog input
16
31 Reference ground for
differential analog input
17
15 Analog input 1+ 18 X7E
48 Analog input 1- 19
32 Analog input 2+ 20 X7F
16 Analog input 2- 21
49 Analog input 3+ 22 X7G
33 Analog input 3- 23
17 Analog input 4+ 24 X7H
50 Analog input 4- 25
Table 5-19 SU10 terminal assignment for SC49, cable end B
SU10 terminal
assignment at
SC49, end B
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-25
Edition 12.2004
5
5.3.3.2 Connector assignment X7 for SC54
Only specific signal types are available at the cable ends, where only the
matching interface modules can be used:
Interface
module
Screw
terminal
(x=1...8)
Significance
SB10
x
5x
1:1 screw terminal connection
Signal
Reference potential (ground or P24)
SB60
x1
x2
x4
Binary inputs 115/230 V
Ground
Binary input 115 V
Binary input 230 V
SB61
x
1x
5x
Binary inputs 24/48 V
Binary input 24 V
Binary input 48 V
Reference
SB70
x1
x2
x4
Binary outputs (relay)
Common (center contact)
NC contact
NO contact
SB71
x
5x
Binary outputs (transistor)
Signal
Ground
Table 5-20 Terminal assignment, interface modules
IT41
X7
Significance
X7A
SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
1 Binary output 1 1 1/51 12/11/14 1/51
34 Binary output 2 2 2/52 22/21/24 2/52
18 Binary output 3 3 3/53 32/31/34 3/53
2 Binary output 4 4 4/54 42/41/44 4/54
35 Binary output 5 5 5/55 52/51/54 5/55
19 Binary output 6 6 6/56 62/61/64 6/56
3 Binary output 7 7 7/57 72/71/74 7/57
36 Binary output 8 8 8/58 81/82/84 8/58
20 External voltage
(24 V)
9 1P 1P 1P
4 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M
Table 5-21 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7,SC54 - end A
Terminal
assignment,
interface modules
Terminal
assignment at
SC54, end A
Input/output modules
5-26 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
IT41
X7
Significance
X7B
SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
37 Binary output 9 1 1/51 12/11/14 1/51
21 Binary output 10 2 2/52 22/21/24 2/52
5 Binary output 11 3 3/53 32/31/34 3/53
38 Binary output 12 4 4/54 42/41/44 4/54
22 Binary output 13 5 5/55 52/51/54 5/55
6 Binary output 14 6 6/56 62/61/64 6/56
39 Binary output 15 7 7/57 72/71/74 7/57
23 Binary output 16 8 8/58 81/82/84 8/58
7 External voltage
(24 V)
9 1P 1P 1P
40 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M
Table 5-22 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7, SC54 - end B
IT41
X7
Significance
X7C
SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
24 Binary input 1 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51
8 Binary input 2 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52
41 Binary input 3 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53
25 Binary input 4 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54
9 Binary input 5 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55
42 Binary input 6 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56
26 Binary input 7 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57
10 Binary input 8 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58
43 External voltage
(24 V)
9 1P 1P 1P
27 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M
Table 5-23 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7, SC54 - cable end C
IT41
X7
Significance
X7D
SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
11 Binary input 9 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51
44 Binary input 10 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52
28 Binary input 11 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53
12 Binary input 12 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54
45 Binary input 13 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55
29 Binary input 14 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56
13 Binary input 15 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57
46 Binary input 16 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58
30 External voltage
(24 V)
9 1P 1P 1P
14 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M
Table 5-24 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7, SC54 - cable end D
Terminal
assignment at
SC54, end B
Terminal
assignment at
SC54, end C
Terminal
assignment at
SC54, end D
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-27
Edition 12.2004
5
IT41
X7
Significance
X7E-X7H
SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
47 Reference ground
for differential
analog inputs
1
31 Reference ground
for differential
analog inputs
2
15 Analog input 1+ 3
48 Analog input 1- 4
32 Analog input 2+ 5
16 Analog input 2- 6
49 Analog input 3+ 7
33 Analog input 3- 8
17 Analog input 4+ 9
50 Analog input 4- 10
Table 5-25 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7, SC54 - cable end E
5.3.4 Mounting
The Itxx module is mounted outside the subrack on a PMx CPU module or is
inserted on an Itxx module already mounted on a PMx (using the 96-pin plug
connector on the module).
All of the modules must be bolted together using the distance pieces
provided (3 are provided)!
The first ITxx, located directly on a CPU modules must be retained using the
metal distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the
PMx). This establishes the electrical contact which is required to identify the
first expansion board.
The metal distance pieces are first retained on the PM4 using the M3
screws, washers and spring washers supplied.
If only one ITxx module is used, then it is screwed to the metal distance
pieces using the M4 nuts provided (and washers).
If a second ITxx module is used, the first ITxx must be screwed using
plastic distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the
ITxx modules).
The second ITxx module can then be inserted and retained using the M4
nuts provided (and washers).
The complete module assembly is then inserted in the subrack.
5.3.5 Application information and noise immunity
• operation without fan is possible
• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed
into the subrack
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
"General technical data"
Terminal
assignment at
SC54, end E
Distance pieces
For the first ITxx
For the second
ITxx
Other information
Input/output modules
5-28 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.3.6 Technical data
No. of slots occupied 1
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220
Weight Approx. 0.6 kg
Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 420 mA
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 450 mA
+ encoder load
(max. 100 mA, electron. limited)
-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 175 mA
24 V (external) 20 V 30 V 100 mA + binary output currents
Number 4
Type Differential inputs, non-floating
Input voltage range -10 V +/- 4 LSB to +10 V +/- 4 LSB
(1 LSB = 4.88 mV)
Input resistance 470 kOhm
Input filter 3 dB transition frequency: 1.5 kHz
Resolution 12 bits
Absolute accuracy Typ. 11 bits over the complete temperature
range
Max. conversion time 45 µs
Number 4
Type Outputs with associated ground terminal, non-
floating
Output voltage range -10 V to +10 V
Output current +/- 10 mA
Resolution 16 bits
Monotony 14 bits over the complete temperature range
Absolute accuracy Typ. 13 bits over the complete temperature
range
Short-circuit protection to
ground
Yes
General data
Power supply
Analog inputs
Analog outputs
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-29
Edition 12.2004
5
Number 16 non-floating
Input voltage 24 V DC rated voltage
for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or open-circuit inputs
for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V
Input current
for 0 signal 0 mA
for 1 signal 3 mA typ.
Delay time 50 µs
Number 16, non-floating
Power supply voltage From external
nominal value 24 V DC
perm. range +20 V to 30 V including ripple
briefly +35 V, max. 0.5 s
Output current for 1 signal
nominal current 50 mA (corresponds to max. value)
Short-circuit protection Electronically and thermally
Limiting inductive switch-off
voltages
Power supply voltage + 1 V
Residual current 20 µA for 0 signal
Signal level
for 0 signal Max. 3 V
for 1 signal Power supply voltage - 2.5 V
Switching delay Max. 15 µs
Number of encoders Total, max. 4 (including 5 V encoder)
Type Differential inputs, electrical isolation
(optocoupler)
Input voltage range Differential voltage -30 V to +30 V
Input voltage (for 15 mA load)
for 0 signal -30 V to +4 V
for 1 signal +8 V to + 30 V
Input current Approx. 15 mA (electronically limited)
Pulse frequency Max. 1 MHz (track frequency)
Phase difference of the track
signals
Independent of the pulse frequency, min.
200 ns
Input filter Can be configured via software (function
block)
Binary inputs
Binary outputs
15 V incremental
encoders
Input/output modules
5-30 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
Number of encoders Total, max. 4 (including 15 V encoder)
Type Differential inputs, floating (optocoupler)
Input voltage range Differential voltage -6 V to +6 V
Input voltage
for 0 signal -5 V to 0 V
for 1 signal +3 V to +5 V
Max. input current 15 mA
Caution: Is not limited!
Pulse frequency Max. 1 MHz (track frequency)
Input circuit, cable
termination
steady-state 180 Ohm (series resistor)
dynamic 100 Ohm (corresponds to the characteristic
impedance of a twisted-pair cable)
Input filter Can be configured via software (function
block)
Number 4 (1 per encoder)
Type Not floating
Input voltage range 0 V to +5 V
Input voltage
for 0 signal < 1.4 V
for 1 signal > 2.0 V
Input current
for 0 signal Min. -5 mA, max. -3.6 mA
for 1 signal Min. -3 mA, max. 0 mA
Number 4 (1 per encoder)
Type Non-floating
Output voltage 15 V via 1 kOhm output resistance
Output voltage 5 V (for 10 mA load)
A Sony encoder HA 705 LK / MSD-560 can be connected without any signal
level adaption.
5 V incremental
encoders
Alarm inputs
Alarm reset
outputs
Sony encoder
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-31
Edition 12.2004
5
5.3.7 Connecting diagrams
X6
X7
IT41
8 BO 8 BI8 BO 8 BI
A
SC49
4 AI
8 BO 3 BI
B
5 BI
8 BI
8 BO
50pin
4 analog inputs AI
4 analog outputs AO
2*8 binary outp. BO
2*8 binary inp. BI
SC54
A B C D E
or
SB10
or
SB60
SB61
SU12
SB10
or
SB70
SB71
SU12
SB10
or
SB70
SB71
SU12
SB10
or
SB60
SB61
SU12
SU10
4 AI
SU10
SU12
CPU
inter-
face
LE
bus
l=5*2m
(each,
10core)
l=2*2m
(each, 26core)
A
SC49
4 incremental
encoder
B
SU10 SU10
l=2*2m
(each, 26core)
50pin 4 AO
4 increm. encoders
Fig. 5-5 Connecting cables and interface modules
Tr
RD2
D1
LC
GND
+-P24
IT41/IT42 SB10
.
IT4xSB10.dsf
10
X2
9
1
D
51
1
X3
Fig. 5-6 Connecting binary outputs with SB10
Binary outputs
with SB10
Input/output modules
5-32 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
Tr
R
D
D
LC
1
GND
+
-
P24
IT41/IT42 SU10
9
10
.
IT4xSU10.dsf
1
10
9
X2
Fig. 5-7 Connecting binary outputs with SU10
Binary outputs
with SU10
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-33
Edition 12.2004
5
5.4 Expansion module IT42
6DD1606-4AB0
The IT42 expansion module provides
analog and binary inputs and outputs
The expansion module is inserted on a CPU module (PM5, PM6). A
maximum of 2 expansion modules ITxx can be inserted on a CPU module.
An ITxx occupies 1 slot (in addition to the mounting slot of the CPU module
itself).
• 4 analog outputs
• 4 integrating, high-resolution analog inputs
(V/fc voltage/frequency conversion)
• 4 analog inputs (ADU)
• 16 binary outputs
• 16 binary inputs
T filter
Driver
50 mA
driver
Latch
DA
DA
DA
DA
+
-
M
U
X
A
D
Dual
port
RAM
IT42
controller
Local expansion bus
P5 M P15 N15
Electrical isolation
16 binary inputs
16 binary output
s
Analog outputs
Analog inputs
UFC
UFC
.
.
.
UFC
UFC
Counter 1/2
Counter 3/4
12 bit
16 bit
Integrating
analog inputs
External trigger
inputs
Contr. bus
Data bus
Address bus
Fig. 5-8 Block diagram of IT42
Order No.
Description
Inputs and outputs
Block diagram
Input/output modules
5-34 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.4.1 Supplementary components
All of the cables for the input / output signals are not directly connected to
the module, but are connected via interface modules. The interface modules
serve as mechanical connection element (screw/plug-in terminals) and to
electrically adapt the plant/system signals (optional).
Interface
module
Function
SB10 Direct connection (1:1 connection)
of 8 binary inputs/outputs, LED, no signal conversion
SB60 8 binary inputs, converted from 230V to 24V (signal level on the
module), LED, electrical isolation (floating)
SB61 8 binary inputs, converted from 48V to 24V, LED, electrical
isolation (floating)
SB70 8 binary outputs, converted from 24V to 230V (changeover relay),
LED, electrical isolation (floating)
SB71 8 binary outputs, converted from 25V to 48V (transistor)
SU10 25 signals are directly connected, no signal conversion
SU12 10 signals are directly connected, no signal conversion
Table 5-26 Interface modules which can be connected to the module
The module is connected to the interface modules using the matching plug-
in cables. The plug-in cables for large connectors have several cable ends,
to which the appropriate number of matching interface modules can be
connected.
Either interface modules with or without signal conversion (e. g. signal level
conversion, electrical isolation) and LED display can be connected at
connectors with binary inputs and outputs.
The selected cable depends on the type of interface module:
Connector
IT42
Signals Cable Interface module
X6 Integrating analog inputs SC50 SU10
X7 Analog outputs/inputs SC51 SU10
X8 Binary outputs/inputs;
trigger inputs for integrating
analog inputs
SC49
or
SC54
2 x SU10
or
5 x SB10
SB60
SB61
SB70
SB71
SU12
Table 5-27 Cables available for use with the module
Interface modules
with terminals
Cables
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-35
Edition 12.2004
5
5.4.2 Connector assignment X6
Connector X6 (15-pin, sub D) connects the signals for
• 4 integrating analog inputs
An SU10 interface module can be connected via plug-in cable SC50 ("1:1
connection from the module to the terminals:
IT42
X6
Significance SU10 Connector
designation when
configuring
1 UFC analog input 1+ 1
9 UFC analog input 1- 2 X6A
2 Ground, input 1 3
10 Ground, input 2 4
3 UFC analog input 2+ 5 X6B
11 UFC analog input 2- 6
4 UFC analog input 3+ 7
12 UFC analog input 3- 8 X6C
5 Ground, input 3 9
13 Ground, input 4 10
6 UFC analog input 4+ 11 X6D
14 UFC analog input 4- 12
7 Not connected 13
15 Not connected 14
8 Not connected 15
- Not connected 16 - 26
Table 5-28 Pin assignment IT42, connector X6 and terminal assignment SU10
5.4.3 Connector assignment X7
Connector X7 (25-pin, sub D) connects the signals for
• 4 analog outputs
• 4 analog inputs
An SU10 interface module can be connected via plug-in cable SC51.
Integrating analog
inputs
at X6 with SU10
Input/output modules
5-36 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
IT42
X7
Significance SU10 Connector
designation when
configuring
1 ADU analog input 1+ 1 X7A
14 ADU analog input 1- 2
2 ADU analog input 2+ 3 X7B
15 ADU analog input 2- 4
3 ADU analog input 3+ 5 X7C
16 ADU analog input 3- 6
4 ADU analog input 4+ 7 X7D
17 ADU analog input 4- 8
5 Reference ground for
differential ADU analog
inputs
(due to push-pull)
9
18 Reference ground for
differential ADU analog
inputs
(due to push-pull)
10
6 Analog output 1+ 11 X7E
19 Ground, inductively de-
coupled
12
7 Analog output 2+ 13 X7F
20 Ground, inductively de-
coupled
14
8 Analog output 3+ 15 X7G
21 Ground, inductively de-
coupled
16
9 Analog output 4+ 17 X7H
22 Ground, inductively de-
coupled
18
10 Ground 19
23 Ground 20
11 Not connected 21
12 Not connected 22
13 Not connected 23
24 Not connected 24
25 Not connected 25
- Not connected 26
Table 5-29 Pin assignment IT42, connector X7 and terminal assignment SU10
Analog
inputs/outputs
at X7 with SU10
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-37
Edition 12.2004
5
5.4.4 Connector assignment X8
Connector X8 (50 pin, sub D) connects the signals for:
• 2*8 binary inputs and 2*8 binary outputs
• 4 trigger signals for integrating analog inputs
The assignment of the 16 binary inputs and outputs corresponds to those of
IT41, connector X7.
5.4.4.1 Connector assignment X8 for SC49
IT42
X8
Significance SU10
at SC49,
cable end
A
Connector
designation when
configuring
1 Binary output 1 1
34 Binary output 2 2
18 Binary output 3 3
2 Binary output 4 4
35 Binary output 5 5 X8A
19 Binary output 6 6
3 Binary output 7 7
36 Binary output 8 8
20 External P24 voltage 9
4 External ground 10
37 Binary output 9 11
21 Binary output 10 12
5 Binary output 11 13
38 Binary output 12 14
22 Binary output 13 15 X8B
6 Binary output 14 16
39 Binary output 15 17
23 Binary output 16 18
7 External P24 voltage 19
40 External ground 20
24 Binary input 1 21
8 Binary input 2 22
41 Binary input 3 23 X8C
25 Binary input 4 24
9 Binary input 5 25
Table 5-30 SU10 terminal assignment for SC49, cable end A
SU10 terminal
assignment at
SC49, end A
Input/output modules
5-38 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
IT42
X8
Significance SU10
at SC49,
cable end
B
Connector
designation when
configuring
42 Binary input 6 1
26 Binary input 7 2 X8C
10 Binary input 8 3
43 External P24 voltage 4
27 External ground 5
11 Binary input 9 6
44 Binary input 10 7
28 Binary input 11 8
12 Binary input 12 9
45 Binary input 13 10 X8D
29 Binary input 14 11
13 Binary input 15 12
46 Binary input 16 13
30 External P24 voltage 14
14 External ground 15
47 Trigger input 1 16
31 Trigger input 2 17
15 Trigger input 3 18
48 Trigger input 4 19
32 Not connected 20
16 Not connected 21
49 Not connected 22
33 Not connected 23
17 External P24 voltage 24
50 External ground 25
Table 5-31 SU10 terminal assignment for SC49, cable end A
SU10 terminal
assignment at
SC49, end B
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-39
Edition 12.2004
5
5.4.4.2 Connector assignment X8 for SC54
Only certain signal types are available at the particular cable ends where
only the matching interface modules can be used:
Interface
module
Screw
terminal
(x=1...8)
Significance
SB10
x
5x
1:1 screw terminal connection
Signal
Reference potential (ground or P24)
SB60
x1
x2
x4
Binary inputs 115/230 V
Ground
Binary input 115 V
Binary input 230 V
SB61
x
1x
5x
Binary inputs 24/48 V
Binary input 24 V
Binary input 48 V
Reference
SB70
x1
x2
x4
Binary outputs (relay)
Common (center contact)
NC contact
NO contact
SB71
x
5x
Binary outputs (transistor)
Signal
Ground
Table 5-32 Terminal assignment of the interface modules
IT42
X8
Significance
X8A
SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
1 Binary output 1 1 1/51 12/11/14 1/51
34 Binary output 2 2 2/52 22/21/24 2/52
18 Binary output 3 3 3/53 32/31/34 3/53
2 Binary output 4 4 4/54 42/41/44 4/54
35 Binary output 5 5 5/55 52/51/54 5/55
19 Binary output 6 6 6/56 62/61/64 6/56
3 Binary output 7 7 7/57 72/71/74 7/57
36 Binary output 8 8 8/58 81/82/84 8/58
20 External P24
voltage
9 1P 1P 1P
4 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M
Table 5-33 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end A
Terminal
assignment,
interface modules
Terminal
assignment at
SC54, end A
Input/output modules
5-40 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
IT42
X8
Significance
X8B
SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
37 Binary output 9 1 1/51 12/11/14 1/51
21 Binary output 10 2 2/52 22/21/24 2/52
5 Binary output 11 3 3/53 32/31/34 3/53
38 Binary output 12 4 4/54 42/41/44 4/54
22 Binary output 13 5 5/55 52/51/54 5/55
6 Binary output 14 6 6/56 62/61/64 6/56
39 Binary output 15 7 7/57 72/71/74 7/57
23 Binary output 16 8 8/58 81/82/84 8/58
7 External P24
voltage
9 1P 1P 1P
40 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M
Table 5-34 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end B
IT42
X8
Significance
X8C
SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
24 Binary input 1 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51
8 Binary input 2 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52
41 Binary input 3 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53
25 Binary input 4 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54
9 Binary input 5 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55
42 Binary input 6 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56
26 Binary input 7 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57
10 Binary input 8 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58
43 External P24
voltage
9 1P 1P 1P
27 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M
Table 5-35 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end C
IT42
X8
Significance
X8D
SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
11 Binary input 9 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51
44 Binary input 10 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52
28 Binary input 11 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53
12 Binary input 12 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54
45 Binary input 13 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55
29 Binary input 14 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56
13 Binary input 15 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57
46 Binary input 16 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58
30 External P24
voltage
9 1P 1P 1P
14 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M
Table 5-36 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end D
Terminal
assignment at
SC54, end B
Terminal
assignment at
SC54, end C
Terminal
assignment at
SC54, end D
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-41
Edition 12.2004
5
IT42
X8
Significance
X8E-X8H
SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71
47 Trigger input 1 1
31 Trigger input 2 2
15 Trigger input 3 3
48 Trigger input 4 4
32 Not connected 5
16 Not connected 6
49 Not connected 7
33 Not connected 8
17 External P24 voltage 9
50 External ground 10
Table 5-37 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end E
5.4.5 Mounting
The Itxx module is mounted outside the subrack on a PMx CPU module or is
inserted on an Itxx module already mounted on a PMx (using the 96-pin plug
connector on the module).
All of the modules must be bolted together using the distance pieces
provided (3 are provided)!
The first ITxx, located directly on a CPU module, must be retained using the
metal distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the
PMx). This establishes the electrical contact which is required to identify the
first expansion board.
The metal distance pieces are first retained on the PM4 using the M3
screws, washers and spring washers supplied.
If only one ITxx module is used, then it is screwed to the metal distance
pieces using the M4 nuts provided (and washers).
If a second ITxx module is used, the first ITxx must be screwed using
plastic distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the
ITxx modules).
The second ITxx module can then be inserted and retained using the M4
nuts provided (and washers).
The complete module assembly is then inserted in the subrack.
5.4.6 Application information and noise immunity
• operation without fan is possible
• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed
into the subrack
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
"General technical data"
Terminal
assignment at
SC54, end E
Distance pieces
For the first ITxx
For the second
ITxx
Other information
Input/output modules
5-42 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.4.7 Technical data
No. of slots occupied 1
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220
Weight Approx. 0.5 kg
Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 420 mA
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 450 mA
-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 140 mA
24 V (external) 20 V 30 V 100 mA + binary output currents
No. 4
Integrating analog inputs Differential inputs, floating, V/f conversion
Integration time • sampling time of the AFC function block or
• the time between 2 positive edges of the
external trigger signal
Input voltage range -10 V to +10 V
Input resistance 470 kOhm
Input filter -3 dB transition frequency : 2 kHz
Resolution Up to 17 bits, depending on the integration time:
13 bits at 1 ms integration time
15 bits at 4 ms integration time
17 bits at 20 ms integration time
Relative accuracy Typ. 14 bits
No. 4
Type Differential inputs, non-floating
Input voltage range -10 V to +10 V
Input resistance 470 kOhm
Input filter -3 dB transition frequency : 1.5 kHz
Resolution 12 bits
Absolute accuracy Typ. 10 bits over the complete temperature
range
Max. conversion time 45 µs.
General data
Power supply
Integrating analog
inputs
Sampling analog
inputs
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-43
Edition 12.2004
5
No. 4
Type Output with associated ground, non-floating
Output voltage range -10 V to +10 V
Output current +/- 10 mA
Resolution 16 bits
Monotony 14 bits over the complete temperature range
Absolute accuracy Typ. 13 bits over the complete temperature
range
Short-circuit protection to
ground
Yes
No. 16 non-floating
Input voltage 24 V DC rated voltage
for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or open-circuit inputs
for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V
Input current
for 0 signal 0 mA
for 1 signal 3 mA typ.
Delay time
for +24 V input signal
50 µs
No. 16, non-floating
Power supply voltage From external
nominal value 24 V DC
perm. range +20 V to 30 V including ripple
it briefly +35 V, max. 0.5 s
Output current for an 1 signal
nominal current 50 mA (also corresponds to the max. value)
Short-circuit protection Electronically and thermally
Limiting inductive switch-off
voltages
Supply voltage + 1 V
Residual current 20 µA for 0 signal
Signal level
for 0 signal Max. 3 V
for 1 signal Supply voltage - 2.5 V
Switching delay Max. 15 µs
Analog outputs
Binary inputs
Binary outputs
Input/output modules
5-44 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.4.8 Connecting diagram
(integrating, V/f)
X6
X7
IT42
8 BO 8 BI8 BO 8 BI
A
SC49
4 trigger integrating AI
8 BO 3 BI
B
5 BI
8 BI8 BO
15pin
25pin
50pin
4 analog inputs AI
4 analog outp. AO
2*8 binary outp. BO
2*8 binary inp. BI
4 trigger signals
for integrating AI
X8
SC50
4 AI,
integrating
SC51
4 AI
SC54
4 AO
A B C D E
or
SB10
or
SB60
SB61
SU12
SB10
or
SB70
SB71
SU12
SB10
or
SB70
SB71
SU12
SB10
or
SB60
SB61
SU12
SU10 SU10
SU12
CPU
inter-
face
LE
bus
SU10
SU10
4 analog inp. AI
l=5*2m
(each, 10core)
l=2m
l=2m
l=2*2m
(each, 26core)
4 trigger
integrating AI
Fig. 5-9 Connecting cables and interface modules
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-45
Edition 12.2004
5
5.5 Converter control ITDC
6DD1601-0AH0
The ITDC expansion module corresponds to the earlier PG16 module, and
provides the gating (control) for
• line-commutated drive converters.
It includes:
• Auto-reversing stage
• Current controller
• Gating unit (for max. 400 Hz output frequency)
• For 6-pulse drive converters
It is especially suitable for connection to SITOR power sections.
The expansion module is inserted on a CPU module (PM5, PM6). A
maximum of 2 expansion modules ITxx can be inserted on a CPU module.
One ITxx occupies 1 slot (in addition to the slot in the CPU module).
Presently, the operation of 2 ITDC modules in one processor module is not
supported.
• 1 SITOR interface
• 2 analog outputs
• 4 binary outputs
• 4 binary inputs
• 1 incremental encoder input:
With zero pulse
Optionally, for differential signals
For tracks, shifted through 90 degrees (A, B)
For 15 V (HTL)- or 5 V encoders
Max. 1 MHz pulse frequency
• No electrical isolation of the inputs-/outputs
Incremental encoders can be connected to the ITDC, with the following
signal voltages
• 15V
• 5V (also as push - pull signals and RS485 differential signals)
The incremental encoder type is selected using DIL switch S1 on the
component side of the ITDC (refer to the following diagram ).
There is the following assignment of the DIL switch settings S1.X to the
pulse encoder channels :
Switch Switch
setting
Function
S1.1 ON Track A, zero volt switching threshold f. 5V encoders
S1.1 OFF Track A, 7V switching threshold f. 15V encoders
S1.2 ON Track B, zero volt switching threshold f. 5V encoders
S1.2 OFF Track B, 7V switching threshold f. 15V encoders
S1.3 ON Zero pulse, 0V switching threshold f. 5V encoders
S1.3 OFF Zero pulse, 7V switching threshold f. 15V encoders
S1.4 any none
Order No.
Description
Inputs and outputs
Incremental
encoder setting
Input/output modules
5-46 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
Corresponding to the setting of the switch on S1, either select the
15V 3-phase encoder (7V switching threshold) or 5V 3-phase encoder (0V
switching threshold).
For the factory setting, the switch is in the OFF position for 15V 3-phase
encoders.
X6
X7
(Component side ITDC)
OFF
ON
1234
S1
X5
H10
H11
Switch position for 15V 3-phase encoders
(OFF switch setting)
Fig. 5-10 Switch position for incremental encoders
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-47
Edition 12.2004
5
50 mA driverLatch
D
A
D
A
ITDC
controller
and
gating unit
Local expansion bus
Address bus
Data bus
Control bus
P5 M P15 N15
4 binary outputs
2 analog outputs
Data bus
Address bus
Control bus
Changeov. switch
Pulse
sensing 5V/15V
T filt er
Driver
4 binary intputs
ASIC U1
Speed input
5V/15V
ASIC U1
ASIC U1
ASIC U1
Curr. act. val. sens.
Zero current sens.
Volt. act. val. sens.
Watchdog
Main pulse length
Second pulse length
Line count er L12
Line count er Usyn
Line angular encoder
Line count er L13
Pulse generator
Sitor interface
Actual values
Pulse end stage
ASIC U1
Line counter Vsyn2
Line counter Vsyn3
Fig. 5-11 Block diagramm ITDC
Block diagram
Input/output modules
5-48 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.5.1 Supplementary components
All of the input / output signal cables are not directly connected to the
module, but are connected through interface modules. The interface
modules serve as mechanical connecting elements (screw plug-in
terminals), and to electrically adapt the plant /system signals and convert
them (optional).
Interface-
module
Function
SB10 Direct connection (1:1 connection)
from 8 binary inputs /outputs, LED, no signal conversion
SB60 8 binary inputs, 230V to 24V conversion (signal level of the
module), LED, electrical isolation
SB61 8 binary inputs, 48V to 24V conversion, LED, electrical
isolation
SB70 8 binary outputs, 24V to 230V conversion (changeover relay),
LED, electrical isolation
SB71 8 binary outputs, 25V to 48V conversion (transistor)
SU11 20 signals can be directly connected, no signal conversion
Table 5-38 Interface modules which can be connected to the module
The module is connected to the interface modules using plug-in cables. Pre-
assembled cables are available for the SU11 interface module.
Interface modules either with or without signal conversion (e.g. signal level
conversion, electrical isolation) and LED display can be used at connector
X5 with binary inputs and outputs.
Pre-assembled cables are not available for the SB10, SB60, SB61, SB70
and SB71 interface modules in conjunction with the ITDC.
Conn., ITDC Signals Cable Interface module
X5 Analog outputs
SITOR start-up signals
SC12
1 x SU11
X6 Binary inputs /outputs and
speed sensing
SC12
-
-
-
-
-
-
1 x SU11
or SB10
SB60
SB61
SB70
SB71
SU12
Table 5-39 Cables which can be used together with the modules
Interface modules
with terminals
Cables
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-49
Edition 12.2004
5
5.5.2 Connector assignment X5
Connector X5 (20-pin plug connector) connects signals for
• 2 analog outputs
• SITOR start-up signals
The SU11 interface module can be connected via SC12 plug-in cable (1:1-
connection from the module to the terminals):
ITDC
X5 Pin
Designation SU 11
X2
Connector
designation for
configuring
1 Analog output 1+ 1 X5A
2 Ground, analog output 1 2
3 Analog output 2+ 3 X5B
4 Ground, analog output 2 4
5 External synchronizing voltage, L1 for 3-
phase synchronization
5
6 Reference voltage for the synchronizing
voltage
6
7 P15 output, 15V
(Ri =600 ohm, not suitable to supply the
encoders)
7
8 Measuring signal "Zero crossover of the
SITOR power supply phase voltage" L13
8
9 Display, zero crossover signal identification,
synchronizing voltage
Logic signal level 15V, Ri=2.2K ohm for an
"H" signal
9
10 External pulse inhibit, if connected to pin 7
or 24V -> pulses enabled
10
11 Excitation current setpoint, 0..10V, Ri=2.2K
ohm
11
12 Measuring signal "Summed pulses" 12
13 Analog current actual value +/-10V,
Ri=2.2K ohm
13
14 Ground (digital), reference potential for
measuring signals
14
15 Measuring signal, "Total pulse inhibit",
pulses enabled = 5V
15
16 Ground, synchronizing module 16
17 Synchronizing voltage U12 for 3-phase
synchronization
17
18 Synchronizing voltage U23 for 3-phase
synchronization
18
19 Synchronizing voltage U31 for 3-phase
synchronization
19
20 Pulse chain synchronizing, connected with
additional PG11/PG16 or ITDC
"H" output voltage: 10-14V
"H" output current: 40mA
20
Table 5-40 Pin assignment ITDC, connector X5 and terminal assignment SU11,
SU11 analog
outputs and start-
up signals via the
SC12 cable
Input/output modules
5-50 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
5.5.3 Connector assignment X6
Connector X6 (20-pin plug connector) connects the signals for:
• 4 binary inputs
• 4 binary outputs
• 1 speed input
The SU11 interface module can be connected via the SC12 plug-in cable
(1:1 connection from the module to the terminals):
ITDC
X6 Pin
Designation SU 11
X2
Connector
designation
for
configuring
1 Binary input 1 1 X6A
2 Binary input 2 2
3 Binary input 3 3
4 Binary input 4 4
5 Binary output 1 5 X6G
6 Binary output 2 6
7 Binary output 3 7
8 Binary output 4 8
9 Pext, positive power supply, max. 30 V 9
10 Mext, 0V power supply 10
11 Speed sensing, track 1A- 11 X6C
12 Speed sensing, track 1A+ 12
13 Speed sensing, track 1B- 13
14 Speed sensing, track 1B+ 14
15 Speed sensing, zero pulse 1N- 15
16 Speed sensing, zero pulse 1N+ 16
17 Coarse pulse 17
18 GND ext. 18
19 GND ext. 19
20 n. c. 20
Table 5-41 Pin assignment ITDC, connector X6 and terminal assignment SU11
5.5.4 Connector assignment X7
Connector X7 (sub-D 50-pin) connects the signals to control (gate) a SITOR
set (three-phase bridge).
Via plug-in cable:
• SC17.2 (screened round cable, 50-pin SUB-D, 2m long), or
• SC31.2 (screened round cable, 50-pin SUB-D, 10m long)
The module can be directly connected to a SITOR set.
SU11 binary
input/output and
speed sensing via
cable SC12
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-51
Edition 12.2004
5
ITDC
X7 Pin
Designation Connector
designation
for
configuring
1 Screen X7G
2 Screen
3 Fuse monitoring (fault = "L")
4 Screen
5 Zero crossover (L1-L3)
6 Screen
7 +/- Iact frequency: 60KHz +/- 30KHz
corresponds to +/- 2 IN
8 Reference voltage, excitation current
setpoint
9 M24 external
10 Pulse. 1.6
11 M24 external
12 Pulse 1.3
13 Screen
14 M24 external
15 Pulse 2.4
16 M24 external
17 Pulse 2.1 X7G
18 VSYN (synchronizing voltage) neutral point
19 Excitation current monitoring (fault = "H")
IE_act < 3,3 %, IE_N = "H")
20 Temperature monitoring (fault = "L")
21 Screen
22 +/- VAIst frequency 60KHz +/- 30KHz
corresponds to +/- VAN
23 Screen
24 +/- Iact analog +/-10V corresponds to +/- IN
(only when connecting a SITOR set, for
SE20.1--> 2P24)
25 Screen
26 M24 external
27 Pulse 1.4
28 M24 external
29 Pulse 1.1
30 Pulse 2.2
31 M24 external
32 Pulse 2.5
33 M24 external
34 VSYN (L1)
35 Undervoltage monitoring (fault = "L")
36 Screen
37 Zero crossover (L1-L2)
SITOR signals
Input/output modules
5-52 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
ITDC
X7 Pin
Designation Connector
designation
for
configuring
38 Screen
39 I = 0 signal (I = 0 corresponds to "H")
40 Screen
41 Excitation current setpoint
IE_N_S (Feldsteller) corresponds to 10 V
42 Pulse 1.2
43 M24 external
44 Pulse 1.5
45 M24 external
46 M24 external
47 Pulse 2.6
48 M24 external
49 Pulse 2.3
50 Screen
Table 5-42 Pin assignment ITDC, connector X7 SITOR signals
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-53
Edition 12.2004
5
5.5.5 Technical data
Insulation group A according to VDE 0110 § 13 Group 2 for 24 V DC,
15 V DC, 5 V DC
Ambient temperature 0 to +55 degrees C and fan operation (force ventil.)
Storage temperature -25 to +70 degrees C
Humidity rating F according to DIN 40050
Altitude rating S according to DIN 40040
Mechanical rating Installed in stationary equipment, which is not
necessarily vibration-free
Packaging system ES 902 C
Dimensions 233.4 mm * 220 mm
Module width 20.14 mm
Installation size 1 slot
Weight 600 g
Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 100 mA
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 490 mA (+ encoder load)
-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 75 mA
24 V (external) +15V +30 V 70 mA (+ load of the binary outputs)
No. 2
Version Output with associated ground,
non-floating
Output voltage range -10 V to +10 V
Output current +/- 10 mA
Resolution 12 bits
Monotony 10 bits over the complete temperature range
Absolute accuracy Typ. 9 bits over the complete temperature range
Short-circuit protection to
ground
Yes
No. 4 non-floating
Input voltage 24 V DC rated voltage
For 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or inputs open-circuit
For 1 signal +13 V to +33 V
Input current
For 0 signal 0 mA
For 1 signal 3 mA typ.
Delay time 120 µs
General data
Power supply
Analog outputs,
connector X5
Binary inputs
connector X6
Input/output modules
5-54 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
No. 4, non-floating
Supply voltage Must be supplied externally
Nominal value 24 V DC
Permiss. range +20 V to 30 V, including ripple
Briefly +35 V, max. 0.5 s
Output current for 1 signal
Rated current 50 mA
Permiss. range To 50 mA
Short-circuit protection Electronic (thermal)
Limiting inductive switch-off
voltages
+ 1 V power supply voltage
Total load 80 % at 50 degrees C, all outputs 50 mA
Residual current 20 µA for a 0 signal
Signal level
For 0 signal Max. 3 V
For 1 signal - 2.5 V power supply voltage
Switching delay 1->0: max. 10 µs
0->1: max. 100 µs
No. of encoders 1, non-floating
Version Differential inputs without electrical isolation,
can be changed over between 5V/15V(HTL)
Track signals Tracks A and B (phase shifted through 90
degrees), if required with zero pulse N
Pulse frequency Max. 1 MHz (track frequency)
Phase difference of the track
signals
Independent of the pulse frequency, min 200 ns
Input voltage for 15V (HTL)
For 0 signal -30 V to +5 V
For 1 signal +8 V to + 30 V
Input voltage for 5V
For 0 signal -7 V to -1.5 V
For 1 signal +1.5 V to + 7 V
Permissible input voltage
range
Differential voltage, -30 V to +30 V
Input resistance Approx. 40K
Fault pulse suppression Can be configured at the speed actual value
function block: 0 - 16 µs (62.5 kHz)
The module does not provide a power supply for the encoder.
5.5.6 Mounting/Installation
When mounted outside the subrack, the ITxx module is inserted on a CPU
module PMx or on an ITxx module, already mounted on PMx (using a 96-pin
plug connector on the module).
All of the modules must be screwed to one another using the spacers
provided (3 spacers)!
The first ITxx, mounted directly on a CPU module, must be retained using
the metal spacers (these are included with the PMx). The electrical contact
which is established is required to identify the first expansion module.
The metal spacers are attached to the PMX using the M3 screws provided
together with the washers and spring washers.
Binary outputs
connector X6
Incremental
encoders
Spacers
For the first ITxx
Input/output modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-55
Edition 12.2004
5
If only one ITxx module is used, it can be screwed to the metal spacers
using the M4 nuts (and washers) provided.
If a second ITxx module is used, the first ITxx module is not screwed using
the nuts, but instead, using plastic spacers (these are included with the ITxx
modules).
The second ITxx module can then be inserted on the plastic spacers, and
screwed together using the M4 nuts (and washers).
After the module assembly has been screwed together, it is inserted into the
subrack.
5.5.7 Application information and noise immunity
• Operation without fans is possible
• Noise immune operation is only possible, if it is tightly screwed into the
subrack.
For more detailed information on EMC and the ambient conditions, refer to
the "General technical data" section!
5.5.8 Connecting diagrams
LE
bus
20pin
50pin
20pin
SC31.2
SC17.2
or
(l=2m)
(l=2m)
SITOR interface SE20.2
SITOR set
or
(each, 50pin)
SITOR
interface
X7
X6
X5
SITOR-
diagnostics sig.
2 anal. outputs
4 dig. outputs DO
4 dig. inputs DI
1 incremental
encoder input
ITDC
SC12
(20pin)
l=2m
SU11
SC12
(20pin)
l=2m
SU11
2 AA
4 BA
4 BE
1 INC
Fig. 5-12 Connecting cables and interface modules
For a second ITxx
Other information
Input/output modules
5-56 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-1
Edition 12.2004
6
6 Communications support modules
6.1 Communications support modules CS 6-2
6.2 SINEC H1 module CSH11 6-12
6.3 Fiber-optic cable subrack coupling CS12-CS22 6-15
6.4 SIMOLINK interface ITSL 6-21
6.5 Interface module SS1 6-23
6.6 Interface module SS2 6-27
6.7 Interface module SS31 6-29
6.8 Communications module SS4 6-31
6.9 Communication modules SS5, SS52 6-41
Overview
Communications support modules
6-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
6.1 Communications support modules CS
6.1.1 Communications support module CS7
6DD1662-0AB0
The CS7 module is a support module for the following communication
modules:
• SS4
• SS5
• SS52
Serial data transfer protocols (DUST, USS, PROFIBUS) can be
implemented using the CS7 and the communication modules.
There is a dual port RAM on the CS7, via which the communication modules
can transfer data with the CPU modules.
• 3 plug-in recptacle for communication modules (X01 to X03)
• Dual port RAM with 16 Kbytes per communications module
• 2 diagnostic LEDs per plug-in compartment (H10/H11, H20/H21 ,
H30/H31) to display the status of the communications module;
the significance of the LED depends on the particular communications
module.
• Transfers the L-bus basic sampling time (for synchronization) on the
communications module;
this function is not used for SS4, SS5, SS52 communication modules.
• Transfers the clock interrupt from the communications module to the CS7
to set the real-time clock of a CPU module;
this function is not used for SS4, SS5, SS52 communication modules.
• An interrupt signal on the L bus can be generated from the
communications module. However, it must be ensured that only one
interface module executes this function (configured).
This function is not used for SS4, SS5, SS52 communication modules,.
• Test socket pair for each plug-in receptacle (X10/X11, X20/X21,
X30/X31) to initiate a reset;
only for test purposes! not for operation!
• L-bus connection
Order No.
Description
Features
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-3
Edition 12.2004
6
The connection between the CS7 support module and the communications
modules is established via the 48-pin socket connectors of the 3 plug-in
receptacle X01, X02 and X03:
Pin A B C
1 P5 P5 L_LOCK
2
A
B1
A
B2
A
B3
3
A
B4
A
B5
A
B6
4
A
B7
A
B8
A
B9
5
A
B10
A
B11
A
B12
6 L_RESET CTCLK
A
B13
7 DB0 DB1 DB2
8 DB3 DB4 DB5
9 DB6 DB7 DB8
10 DB9 DB10 DB11
11 DB12 DB13 DB14
12 DB15 L_DEN L_CSMSB
13 L_INTDPR DT_L_R L_CSLSB
14 L_RDYDPR L_LED1 L_LED2
15 P15 N15 L_INTUHR
16 M5 M5 M5
Interface to the
communications
module
Communications support modules
6-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
6.1.1.1 Application information and noise immunity
• operation without fan is possible
• the front panels of the inserted communication modules must be
connected to the CS7 front panel using the screen cable supplied!
• slot covers must be provided at empty receptacle.
• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed
into the subrack
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
„General technical data“
Other information
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-5
Edition 12.2004
6
SIEMENS 6DD1688-0AE0 SS5
X5
SIEMENS 6DD1688-0AE0 SS5
X5
SIEMENS 6DD1688-0AD0 SS4
X5
SIEMENS 6DD1662-0AB0 CS7
X11
X10
H11
H10
X21
X20
H21
H20
X31
X30
H31
H30
Fig. 6-1 CS7 front panel
Communications support modules
6-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
6.1.1.2 Technical data
No. of slots occupied 2
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 40.28 x 233.4 x 220
Weight Approx. 0.5 kg
Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 0.5 A + current drain of the interface
modules
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V Current drain of the interface
modules
-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V Current drain of the interface
modules
General data
Power supply
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-7
Edition 12.2004
6
6.1.1.3 Connecting diagram
L bus
CS7
26pin
SS4
9pin
SS5
SS52 9pin
SC57
l=5m
Cable 1
COM1/2
Operator
control unit
(PC)
9 pin
l=0.5m
Cable 2
.
9 pin
26 pin
SM8
Partial connector set
Connector assignment SS4
RS 232
TxD=4
RxD=17
Grd=9
RS 485 (USS-Bus)
+RS485P =5
-RS485N =17
Grd=9
D-Sub,
high density
Connector assignment SS5
RS 232 (Monitor)
TxD=7
RxD=2
Grd=5
RS 485 (PROFIBUS)
+Tx/Rx-Sig. =3
-Tx/Rx-Sig. =8
Grd=5
SM5
Partial connector set
Connector assignment SS52
RS 232 (Monitor)
TxD=7
RxD=2
Grd=5
RS 485 (PROFIBUS)
+Tx/Rx-Sig. =3
-Tx/Rx-Sig. =8
Grd=5
SM5
Partial connector set
D-Sub
D-Sub
DUST/USS
PROFIBUS FMS
PROFIBUS DP
or
or
or
Fig. 6-2 Connecting communication modules and cables
Communications support modules
6-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
6.1.2 Communications support module CS8
6DD1662-0AC0
The CS8 module is a support module for the following communication
modules:
• CBP1, CBP2
• CBC, CBD, CBI, CBL
Serial data transfer protocols (CAN, DEVICE-NET, PROFIBUS) can be
implemented using CS8 and the communication modules.
• 2 slots (X01, X02) to accept 2 communication modules (COMBOARDs).
• The special covers supplied must be mounted onto the COMBOARDs, so
that they are electrically connected and grounded, for EMC-, dust
protection- and safety reasons.
• L-bus connection
The connection between the CS8 support module and the communication
modules is established via the 64-pin plug connectors of the 2 slots X01 and
X02:
Pin-
No.
Signal-
name
Pin-
No.
Signal-
name
Pin-
No.
Signal-
name
Pin-
No.
Signal name
A1 N15 A9 D10 A17 M A25 L_BUSY
B1 N15 B9 D11 B17 P5 B25 L_INT_CU_DPR
A2 M A10 D12 A18 A8 A26 L_INT_DPR_CU
B2 M B10 D13 B18 A9 B26 TEMPERATURE
A3 D0 A11 D14 A19 A10 A27 L_DSAVE
B3 D1 B11 D15 B19 A11 B27 ATACHO_DPR
A4 D2 A12 M A20 A12 A28 BTACHO_DPR
B4 D3 B12 SYNC_DNE B20 Excitation B28 P15_OK
A5 D4 A13 NR_TACHO A21 M A29 P24_AUX
B5 D5 B13 A1 B21 P5 B29 M24_AUX
A6 D6 A14 A2 A22 L_RD A30 P15
B6 D7 B14 A3 B22 L_WR B30 P15
A7 M A15 A4 A23 L_CS A31 M
B7 P5 B15 A5 B23 SYNC_TAC B31 M
A8 D8 A16 A6 A24 M A32 SINE
B8 D9 B16 A7 B24 L_RESET B32 COSINE
Order No.
Description
Features
Interface to the
communications
module
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-9
Edition 12.2004
6
6.1.2.1 Application information and noise immunity
• Operation without fans possible
• The communication modules are screwed to the PC board of CS8! The
cut-outs of the covers supplied, must be adapted to the connector
dimensions of the communication modules.
• The cover is mounted between the CS8 and the communications
module.
• Free slots must be covered with complete covers.
• Noise-immune operation is only possible if they are screwed into the
subrack
For additional information on EMC and the ambient conditions, refer to
Section "General technical data“!
Other information
Communications support modules
6-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
SI EM EN S
6DD1662-0AC0
CS8
A B C X01
X02
1 (Cutout for COMBOARD)
2 (Hole for mounting to the cover)
3 (Hole for mounting panel to the PC board over endpiece)
1 (Cutout for COMBOARD)
2 (Hole for mounting to the cover)
3 (Hole for mounting panel to the PC board over endpiece)
2 (Hole for mounting to the cover)
2 (Hole for mounting to the cover)
4 (Slot designation)
4 (Slot designation)
4 (Module designation, MLFB, product version)
Front panel
Captive nut for mounting
to the front panel
Captive nut for mounting
to the front
p
anel
Cover
Captive nut for mounting
to the front panel
Fig. 6-3 CS8 front panel and cover
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-11
Edition 12.2004
6
6.1.2.2 Technical data
Slot assignment 1
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 18.3 x 233.4 x 220
Weight approx. 0.3 kg
Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 0.5 A + current drain of the interface
modules
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V Current drain of the interface
modules
-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V Current drain of the interface
modules
6.1.2.3 Connection diagram
L-
Bus
Communikations
module CB..
Communikations
module CB..
CS8
X02
X01
Fig. 6-4 Possibilities of connecting communication modules
General data
Power supply
Communications support modules
6-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
6.2 SINEC H1 module CSH11
6DD1661-0AB1
A connection to the industrial SINEC H1 communications network
(„Industrial Ethernet“) is established using the CSH11 module.
The module includes the CP1470 module (CP: Communications Processor)
and a dual port RAM to transfer data to the CPU modules.
• serial interface to parameterize the CP1470 (X5)
• serial interface to connect to SINEC H1 (X6)
• diagnostics LED
• function selector switch and reset button
• transferring clock interrupts from the CP1470 onto the C bus
• L- and C bus connection
The 15-pin connector X6 is connected to SINEC H1 bus coupler via the
SINEC H1 drop cable 727-1. The drop cable must be latched into place
using the latch mechanism.
The maximum cable length of the bus coupling cable may not exceed 50 m.
A description of the SINEC H1 drop cable and additional bus components
and their Order Nos. are provided in Catalog "SINEC Industrial
Communication Networks, IK 10".
There is an asynchronous serial interface to parameterize the CP1470 (e. g.
setting the Ethernet address) and administration using the configuring
software SINEC NML from a PC, at the 25 pin connector X5.
SINEC NML must also be ordered:
Order No.: 6GK 1740-0AB01-0EA0
To connect PG7xx programmers or AT-compatible PCs, it also has
• a passive 20 mA line current interface (TTY) as well as
• RS 232 (V.24) interface
with a 9.6 kbaud baud rate.
A switch with the ADM/RUN/STP settings and a reset button are provided on
the front panel.
Switch position Function
ADM Resetting the CP1470 via reset button
RUN Communications is established
STP Communications is interrupted
Order No.
Description
Features
Connection to
SINEC H1
Ordering data
Parameterization
Switch
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-13
Edition 12.2004
6
The CP1470 can be reset using the reset button. The switch must first be
set to "ADM".
Green Red Significance
Dark Dark No power supply;
temporary initialization status
Lit Dark Database and synchronization O.K.
Flashi
ng
Dark Database inconsistent; correct NML configuring
Dark Lit No synchronization with the initializing CPU module;
possible cause: @CSH11 function block not configured,
incorrect slot or incompatible firmware
Dark Flashin
g
Hardware fault
Flashi
ng
Lit Switch in the STOP setting or ADM
The function of the LEDs is also described in the User Instructions
„Configuring the communications“.
6.2.1 Application information and noise immunity
• the module may only be used in forced-ventilated subracks.
• the serial connecting cables must be latched-in using the latching
mechanisms provided.
• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed
into the subrack
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
„General technical data“.
6.2.2 Connector assignment of the interfaces
25-pin sub D socket connector
Pin RS-232 TTY
1 Screen ----
2 TxD ----
3 RxD ----
7 Ground ----
9 ---- +RxD
10 ---- -RxD
18 ---- +TxD
21 ---- -TxD
Reset button
LED
Other information
Parameterizing
interface X5
Communications support modules
6-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
15-pin sub D socket connector
Pin Signal name Code
1 Collision ( screen ) CI-S
2 Collision ( + ) CI-A
3 Transmit data ( + ) DO-A
4 Receive data ( screen ) DI-S
5 Receive data ( + ) DI-A
6 Power supply ( - ) VC
7 Control signal ( + ) CO-A
8 Control signal ( screen ) CO-S
9 Collision ( - ) CI-B
10 Transmit data ( - ) DO-B
11 Transmit data ( screen ) DO-S
12 Receive data ( - ) DI-B
13 Power supply ( + ) VP
14 Power supply ( screen ) VS
15 Control signal ( - ) CO-B
Housing Overall screen PG
6.2.3 Technical data
No. of slots occupied 1
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220
Weight Approx. 0.5 kg
Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 2,5 A
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 100 mA without connecting to a
SINEC H1 bus coupler
600 mA with connecting to a SINEC
H1 bus coupler
-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V Max. 100 mA
SINEC H1 interface
X6
General data
Power supply
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-15
Edition 12.2004
6
6.3 Fiber-optic cable subrack coupling CS12-CS22
CS12: 6DD1660-0BC0
CS13: 6DD1660-0BB0
CS14: 6DD1660-0BA0
CS22: 6DD1660-0BD0
An extremely fast coupling can be established between as many subracks
as required via fiber-optic cable using the CS12 modules (or CS13, CS14)
and CS22.
A fiber-optic coupling consists of a master module, to which 1 to max. 8
slave modules can be connected. All of the master- and slave modules are
accommodated in a dedicated subrack.
The coupling practically represents an extension of the backplane bus,
whereby data transfer is realized via the RAM memory on the CS12. All of
the connected CS22 slave modules can access this; they all have the same
priority.
CS13 and CS14 consist of a CS12- and one or two ICS1 modules, which
have fiber-optic cable connections for up to 4 or 8 slaves.
• max. fiber-optic cable length of a point-to-point connection: 200 m
• data transfer time:
approx. 5 µs each 16-bit value for a L/C bus under normal load
conditions
max. approx. 32 µs per 16-bit value for an L/C bus under extremely high
load conditions
• 128 kbyte RAM memory on CS12
• a master module can transfer the following signals to the slave:
− basic sampling time (to synchronize the slave)
− alarm interrupt (to call an interrupt task)
− clock interrupt (to set the real-time clock)
• L- and C bus connections;
• not intended for use in the SR6(V), as data transfer is only realized via
the C bus
Order No.
Description
Features
Communications support modules
6-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
6.3.1 Slave connection
Depending on the master module type, 1 to 8 slaves (CS22) can be
connected:
Master module No. of slots No. of slaves
(CS22)
CS12 1 1
CS13
(consists of CS12 + ICS1)
2 1 to 4
CS14
(consists of CS12 + ICS1 + ICS1)
3 1 to 8
The following diagrams and tables illustrate the fiber-optic cable connections
to be connected for the possible master-slave configurations.
The interfaces are defined (fiber-optic cable connections) by appropriately
configuring in HWConfig.
For CS13 and CS14, the two fiber-optic cable connections on the basic
CS12 module are not used
Master module
CS12
Slave module
CS22
CS12 Type 1
X5 Trans. X6
X6 Rec. X5
Connecting 1 slave
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-17
Edition 12.2004
6
X5X6
X5X6
CS22
X5X6
CS22
X5X6
CS22
X5X6
CS22
X6 X5
X8 X7
X10 X9
X12 X11
ICS1
CS13
( 1 )
( 2 )
( 3 )
( 4 )
Basic module
Master module
CS13
Slave module
CS22
CS12 ICS1 Type 1 2 3 4
X5 Not
X6 used
X5 Trans. X6
X6 Rec. X5
X7 Trans. X6
X8 Rec. X5
X9 Trans. X6
X10 Rec. X5
X11 Trans. X6
X12 Rec. X5
Connecting 4
slaves
Communications support modules
6-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
CS12
CS22
CS22
CS22
CS22
CS14
ICS1 ICS1
( 1 )
( 1 ) ( 2 ) ( 2 )
( 7 )
( 8 )
Master module
CS14
Slave module
CS22
CS12 ICS1 ICS1 Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X5 Not
X6 used
X5 Trans. X6
X6 Rec. X5
X7 Trans. X6
X8 Rec. X5
X9 Trans. X6
X10 Rec. X5
X11 Trans. X6
X12 Rec. X5
X5 Trans. X6
X6 Rec. X5
X7 Trans. X6
X8 Rec. X5
X9 Trans. X6
X10 Rec. X5
X11 Trans. X6
X12 Rec. X5
In a subrack, several master modules as well as master- and slave modules
can be used together. Thus, branched or extremely large networks can be
created.
Connecting 8
slaves
Cascading
capability
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-19
Edition 12.2004
6
6.3.2 Supplementary components
The following fiber-optic cable is used for the coupling:
SINEC FIBER OPTIC CABLE standard cable,
assembled in pairs with 4 BFOC connectors
A detailed description of the fiber-optic cable is described in Catalog "SINEC
Industrial Communication Networks, IK 10".
Table 6-1 Fiber-optic cable Order No. and length code
6.3.3 Application information and noise immunity
• The CS1x, CS22 modules may only be used in a force-ventilated
subrack.
• The modules can only be used in SR12.x and SR24.x subracks (C bus
required).
• Before the power supply voltage of a subrack is switched-on (powered-
up), all of the plug connections of the fiber-optic cables involved must be
inserted.
In operation, the plug connectors of the fiber-optic cable coupling
may not be released.
• Master- and slave subracks can be powered-down while in operation
and powered-up again. The coupling is then re-established.
Fiber-optic cable
Order designation
6XV1 820-5B
H
N
T
U
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Multiplier 0,1 m
1 m
10 m
100 m
Length code 0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Communications support modules
6-20 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
• If a fiber-optic cable is not inserted, the transmit- and receive connections
must be protected using the appropriate caps
• As CS13, CS14 of the ICS1 partial modules do not have a connector at
the L/C bus, when required, Daisy Chain jumpers must be inserted (if
there is still a CPU module to the right)!
• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed
into the subrack
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
"General technical data"
6.3.4 Technical data
No. of slots occupied CS12: 1
CS13: 2
CS14: 3
CS22: 1
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] CS12: 20.14 x 233.4 x 220
CS13: 40.28 x 233.4 x 220
CS14: 60.42 x 233.4 x 220
CS22: 20.14 x 233.4 x 220
Weight [kg] CS12: 0.5
CS13: 0.8
CS14: 1.1
CS22: 0.4
Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V CS12: 1.8 A
CS13: 4.0 A
CS14: 5.5 A
CS22: 1.5 A
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V CS12: 50 mA
CS13: 100 mA
CS14: 150 mA
CS22: 150 mA
Other information
General data
Power supply
voltage
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-21
Edition 12.2004
6
6.4 SIMOLINK interface ITSL
6DD1663-0AB0
Using the ITSL expansion module, a connection is established to an
extremely fast, synchronous
SIMOLINK fiber-optic cable bus
The expansion module is inserted on a CPU module (PM5, PM6). A
maximum of 2 ITxx expansion modules can be inserted on a CPU module.
An ITxx occupies 1 slot (in addition to the CPU module slot).
• 2 plug connectors for an incoming and outgoing fiber-optic cable
6.4.1 Supplementary components
Fiber-optic cable
6.4.2 Mounting
The Itxx module is mounted outside the subrack on a PMx CPU module or is
inserted on an Itxx module already mounted on a PMx (using the 96-pin plug
connector on the module).
All of the modules must be bolted together using the distance pieces
provided (3 are provided)!
The first ITxx, located directly on a CPU module must be retained using the
metal distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the
PMx). This establishes the electrical contact which is required to identify the
first expansion board.
The metal distance pieces are first retained on the PM4 using the M3
screws, washers and spring washers supplied.
If only one ITxx module is used, then it is screwed to the metal distance
elements using the M4 nuts provided (and washers).
If a second ITxx module is used, the first ITxx must be screwed using
plastic distance pieces (this is included in the scope of supply of the ITxx
modules).
The second ITxx module can then be inserted and retained using the M4
nuts provided (and washers).
The complete module assembly is then inserted in the subrack.
6.4.3 Application information and noise immunity
• operation without fan is possible
• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed
into the subrack
Order No.
Description
Inputs and outputs
Distance pieces
For the first ITxx
For the second
ITxx
Communications support modules
6-22 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
„General technical data“
6.4.4 Technical data
No. of slots 1
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220
Weight Approx. 0.6 kg
Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 420 mA
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 450 mA
-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 175 mA
Other information
General data
Power supply
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-23
Edition 12.2004
6
6.5 Interface module SS1
6DD1688-1AA0
The SS4 communications module with SS1 interface module can be
equipped with a 20 mA line current interface.
The SS1 has, for the receiver and for the transmitter, a current source and
current drain, so that coupling partners without current sink can be
connected.
The interface module is a 40-pin (dual-in-line) hybrid circuit which is used in
the socket provided on the SS4 communications module.
When inserting the module, ensure that it is correctly aligned: The recesses
of the socket of the interface module (or pin 1, marked with a point) and the
socket on the SS4 (X51) must coincide.
• electrical isolation via optocoupler
• independent transmit- and receive channels
• 2 current sources
• 2 current sinks
• data transfer rate up to 38.4 kbaud
• max. cable length: 1000 m
In order to achieve data transfer with the highest possible noise immunity,
even at high baud rates and long cable lengths, we recommend that the
cables are connected, so that the current source (+Iq) and transmitter (+/-
TxD) are located at the same cable end.
In this case, the cable capacitance must only be charged with the diode
voltage (receiver). If the transmitter (transmit transistor) is located as current
source at the other cable end, the cable capacitance must be charged with
approximately the supply voltage.
Order No.
Description
Features
Recommended
connection
Communications support modules
6-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
Please compare the following connection examples:
"P
"M
+Iq
+RxD
-RxD
-Iq
Cable
capacitance
+TxD
-TxD
a)
"P
"M
+Iq
+RxD
-RxD
-Iq
Cable
capacitance
+TxD
-TxD
b)
Fig. 6-5: Unfavorable cable connection:
Current source and transmitter at different ends
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-25
Edition 12.2004
6
"P
"M
+Iq +RxD
-RxD
-Iq
+TxD
-TxD
a)
b)
"P
"M
+Iq
+RxD
-RxD-Iq
+TxD
-TxD
Fig. 6-6: Recommended cable connection:
Current source and transmitter at the same end
Communications support modules
6-26 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
6.5.1 Pin assignment
Pin Significance Pin Significance
1 +15 V 21 GND
2 GND 22 GND
3 - 23 -
4 GND 24 -
5 -15 V 25 -
6 Not assigned 26 -
7 Not assigned 27 -T*D
8 Not assigned 28 -
9 Not assigned 29 Not assigned
10 T*D 30 Not assigned
11 NC 31 -Iq2
12 R*D 32 -
13 - 33 -
14 - 34 +T*D
15 -R*D 35 -
16 - 36 -
17 - 37 -Iq1
18 Not assigned 38 +Iq1
19 +Iq2 39 -
20 Not assigned 40 +R*D
Table 6-2 Pin assignment of the SS1 (dual inline, 40 pin)
6.5.2 Technical data
Dimensions (W x H x D) 50.8 x 18.6 x 8.6 mm
Weight 11 g
Data transfer rate Max. 38.4 kbaud
Max. cable length Max. 1000 m
+5 V Max. 95 mA
+15 V Max. 75 mA
-15 V Max. 75 mA
General data
Power supply
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-27
Edition 12.2004
6
6.6 Interface module SS2
6DD1688-1AB0
The SS4 communications module can be equipped with an
additional/extended RS 232 (V.24) interface using the SS2 interface
module.
The interface module is a 40 pin (dual-in-line) hybrid device which can be
inserted in the socket provided on the SS4 communication module.
When inserting the sub-module, ensure that it is correctly aligned: The
recesses of the socket of the interface module (or pin 1, marked with a point)
and the socket on the SS4 (X51) must coincide.
• suitable for modem connection
• data transfer rates up to 38.4 kbaud
• max. cable length: 15 m
• external connections with V.28 signal level:
E2, D1, D2, S1.2, S2, M1, M2, M5, T1, T2, T4
6.6.1 Pin assignment
Pin Significance Pin Significance
1 +15 V 21 Ground
2 Ground 22 Ground
3 + 5 V 23 T4
4 Ground 24 M2
5 -15 V 25 NC
6 *DCD 26 M1
7 *CTS 27 NC
8 *RTS 28 E2
9 *DTR 29 S1.2
10 T*D 30 M5
11 *(TR*C) 31 -
12 R*D 32 -
13 *(RT*C) 33 Not assigned
14 Not assigned 34 Not assigned
15 Not assigned 35 Not assigned
16 D1 36 -
17 T2 37 T1
18 D2 38 -
19 Not assigned 39 -
20 S2 40 -
Order No.
Description
Features
Communications support modules
6-28 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
6.6.2 Technical data
Dimensions (W x H x D) 50.8 x 18.6 x 8.6 mm
Weight 11 g
Data transfer rate Max. 38.4 kbaud
Max. distance 15 m
+15 V Max. 75 mA
+5 V Max. 95 mA
-15 V Max. 75 mA
General data
Power supply
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-29
Edition 12.2004
6
6.7 Interface module SS31
6DD1688-1AC1
The SS4 communications module can be equipped with an RS 485
interface to establish a USS bus connection using the SS31 interface sub-
module.
The interface module is a 40 pin (dual-in-line) hybrid device which can be
inserted in the socket provided on the SS4 communications module.
When inserting the module, ensure that it is correctly aligned: The recesses
of the socket of the interface module (or pin 1, marked with a point) and the
socket on the SS4 (X51) must coincide.
• data transfer rate up to 1 Mbaud
• max. cable length dependent on the baud rate:
200 m at 1 Mbaud
• no terminating resistor
To enable the transmitter, the RTS signal must be set to „1“.
This enable signal is generated using an appropriate jumper in the
connector of the SS4 communications module.
6.7.1 Pin assignment
Pin No Function Pin No Function
1 Not assigned 21 0V
2 0V 22 0V
3 5V 23 -TxD
4 0V 24 +TxD
5 Not assigned 25 Not assigned
6 DCD 26 +RTxC
7 0V 27 -RTxC
8 RTS 28 +DCD
9 Not assigned 29 -DCD
10 TxD 30 +RxD
11 TRxC 31 -RxD
12 RxD 32 5V
13 RTxC 33 5V
14 Not assigned 34 Not assigned
15 -RTS 35 0V
16 +RTS 36 0V
17 -TRxC 37 Not assigned
18 +TRxC 38 Not assigned
19 Not assigned 39 Not assigned
20 Not assigned 40 Not assigned
Order No.
Description
Features
Enabling the
transmitter
Communications support modules
6-30 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
Table 6-3 Pin assignment of SS31, dual-in-line version, 40 pin
6.7.2 Technical data
Dimensions (W x H x D) 50.8 x 18.6 x 9.0 mm
Weight Approx. 15 g
Data transfer rate Max. 1 Mbaud
Cable length Max. 200 m
Power supply voltage +5 V +/- 5%
Current drain, nominal value 90 mA
General data
Power supply
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-31
Edition 12.2004
6
6.8 Communications module SS4
6DD1688-0AD0
The following serial interfaces (data transfer protocols) can be
implemented using the SS4 communications module:
Protocol Application
DUST1 Connecting configuring- and operator control PCs,
e. g. to load the program mode and for start-up (commissioning)
DUST2 Connecting a message printer
DUST3 Connecting SIMATIC S5 (AS 512 or CP 525)
USS Connecting
• OP2 operator control panels
• VD1 text displays
• drive converters to the process coupling;
The SS4 is USS master and can be operated on the USS bus.
Max. baud rate: 187.5 kbaud
The communications module is a plug-in module for the CS7 support
module. The CS7 support module, the communications module and its
selected receptacle are configured using HWConfig. A maximum of 3
communication modules can be inserted on the CS7.
Data is transferred with the CPU modules via a 16 kbyte dual port RAM
which is located on the CS7 support module.
The configurable SS4 interface has, as standard an RS 232 physical
interface to connect to the COM interfaces of a PC.
Other physical interfaces can be selected using an optional interface module
which can be inserted on the SS4:
Interface
module
Physical interface
(signal level along the cable)
Application
SS1 20 mA line current (TTY) Long data transfer lines;
interrupted lines can be reliably
identified
SS2 RS 232 („V.24“) For printers with control signals
(RTS, CTS)
SS31 RS 485 USS protocol
The maximum baud rate is 187.5 kbaud and is dependent on the associated
protocol software and if relevant, the interface modules used (refer under
interface modules).
6.8.1 Connecting programmers or PC
Connecting cables for PG740, PG750 or PG770 programmers can be
assembled using the SM8 parts set (for SS4) or an appropriate parts set for
Order No.
Description
CS7
plug-in module
Physical interface
Communications support modules
6-32 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
the programmer side, according to the following drawing.
A 4-core screened round cable is required (e. g. LICYC 4*0,5, Metrofunk).
Operating a PC or PG750/770 via the standard RS 232 (V.24) interface:
18
26
13
1
2514
91
10
19
SS4 PG750/770 ( COM 1, V24 )
Fig. 6-7 SS4 at a PG750/770 ( COM1 ) via the RS 232 interface
(the two jumpers for the PC are not required!)
Operating the PG750/770 at the active SS4 communications module
(active: Line current source and -sink on the SS4 side; thus, higher data
integrity can be achieved with long cables and high baud rates):
18
26
13
1
2514
91
10
19
PG750/770 ( COM 1, 20mA )
passive
SS4 active
Fig. 6-8 SS4 at PG750/770 ( COM1 ) via the 20mA interface (active)
Operating the PG750/770 at the passive SS4 communications module
(passive: Line current source and -sink are not at the SS4 side):
18
26
13
1
2514
91
10
19
SS4 passive PG750/770 ( COM 1, 20mA ) active
Fig. 6-9 SS4 at PG750/770 ( COM1 ) via the 20mA interface (passive)
NOTE If the PG750/770 is operated as passive 20 mA current interface, then
switches S3/2 and S3/3 in the PG must be opened (refer to the
PG750/770 Manual).
RS 232
interface
20mA interface
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-33
Edition 12.2004
6
6.8.2 USS connection for OP2, VD1
Connecting cables for the OP2 operator control device or the VD1 numerical
display can be assembled using the SM8 parts set (for SS4) or an
appropriate parts set for OP2/VD1 (OP2: Parts set SM5) according to the
following diagrams.
A 4-core screened round cable is required (e. g. LICYC 4*0,5, Metrofunk).
In order to increase the data integrity, the bus cable at both ends (at the first
and last nodes) must be terminated using a resistor network:
• an 150Ω resistor between the RS485+, RS485- data signal lines
• one 390Ω resistor each from the data signal cables RS485+ to +5 V and
from RS485- to ground to define a quiescent signal level when a node is
not transmitting („basis network“)
For the VD1 numerical display, the bus termination (including basis
network) is already integrated in the unit. These can be activated using the
two DIL switches S1/S2.
RS485+
390R
390R
150R
SS4
RS485-
S1 - ON
S2 - ON
VD1
OP2
390R
390R
150R
Fig. 6-10 SS4 at OP2 and VD1; with bus terminating circuitry
Bus termination
USS bus with
connection
Communications support modules
6-34 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
390
390
150
RS485+
RS485-
Bus terminating resistor
+5V
0V
Resistor to the
supply voltage
Resistor to the
signal reference
Fig. 6-11 RS 485 bus termination
390
150
RS485+
22
390
RS485-
18
21
17
5
8
7
14
2
20
USS busSS4
Fig. 6-12 Connector assignment SS4 with bus termination
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-35
Edition 12.2004
6
RS485+
Incoming
Outgoing
bus cable
RS485-
21
17
5
8
7
14
2
20
USS busSS4
Fig. 6-13 SS4 Connector assignment without bus termination (SS4 at the center of the bus
cable)
390
390
150
390
390
150
++
Screen
Data cable
Potential bonding
Housing ground
Grounding rail
Fig. 6-14 Screening and potential bonding of the data cable
USS bus cable
without circuitry
Communications support modules
6-36 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
6.8.3 Supplementary components
• SM8 connector parts set (26 pin, high-density plug connector)
• interface module:
A 40-pin dual inline socket X51 is provided in the communications
module. An interface module can be inserted in this socket in order to
implement an RS 485 (for USS) or 20mA interface instead of the existing
RS 232.
− interface module SS1 (20 mA)
− interface module SS2 (RS 232)
− interface module SS31 (RS 485)
When inserting the interface module, the mounting position must be
observed:
The recesses of the socket of the interface module (and pin 1, marked by
the point) and that of the socket on the SS4 (X51) must coincide.
6.8.4 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity
The front panel of the communications module must be connected to the
front panel of the CS7 using the cables provided with the CS7.
The data transfer cable screen (bus cable) must be grounded to a grounding
rail through the largest possible surface area where the cable enters the
equipment. In addition, the screen must be connected to the housing in the
connector housing. The connector must be screwed to the communications
module.
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
„General technical data“
Front panel
grounding with
CS7
Cable
screen
Other information
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-37
Edition 12.2004
6
6.8.5 SS4 diagnostic functions
Each receptacle of the CS7 support module has 2 LEDs, which allow
diagnostic of the associated communication module (operating and
fault/error conditions).
LEDs on CS7 Significance for SS4
Green
H10 / H20 / H30
Yellow
H11 / H21 / H31
Dark Dark Communications module not initialized
Flashing Flashing RAM test error
Flashing Dark Hardware of the communications
module is initialized;
wait for a connection to be established
to the initializing CPU module
Lit Dark DUST / USS initialized
Lit Lit Data transfer running
Dark Lit Software error
Table 6-4 Functions of the LEDs on CS7
An additional four LEDs for interface diagnostics is provided on the
communications module. However, when installed these LEDs are not
visible.
LED on SS4 Significance for SS4
H1 Dark / lit:
Flickers / glows:
Hex monitor not receiving
Hex monitor receiving data
H2 Dark / lit:
Flickers / glows:
Hex monitor not transmitting data
Hex monitor transmitting data
H3 Dark / lit:
Flickers / glows:
DUST/USS interface not transmitting
DUST/USS interface transmitting data
H4 Dark / lit:
Flickers / glows:
DUST/USS interface not receiving data
DUST/USS interface receiving data
Table 6-5 Functions of the LEDs on SS4
LED on CS7
LED on SS4
Communications support modules
6-38 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
The 26-pin interface connector X5 includes, in addition to the signals of the
configurable interface, also the signals of an RS 232 diagnostics interface
(„hexadecimal monitor“).
The required connecting cable, together with the cable of the configurable
interface must be connected at the interface connector to use this
diagnostics interface:
Pin Diagnostics interface X5 (RS-232)
1 TxD
9 GND
26 RxD
Fig. 6-15 Pin assignment of the diagnostics interface
SM8
Configured
interface
(DUST/USS) Connector for PC
(9-, 25 pin)
26-pin high density plug connector
to the SS4 interface module
Fig. 6-16 Connecting the configuring- and diagnostics interface at connector X5.
Diagnostics
interface X5
18
26
13
1
2514
91
10
19
SS4 Hex monitor (V.24)
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-39
Edition 12.2004
6
6.8.6 Connector assignment X5
Pin RS 232
standard
interface
RS 232
with SS2
20 mA
with SS1
RS 485
with SS31
1
2 TxD +RTS
3 RxD +TRxD
4 TxD
5 CTS RS485+
6 DCD +RTxC
7 GND +Iq2 +DCD
8 DCD +RxD
9 GND GND GND GND
10 +TxD
11 P15 P15 P15 P15
12 +Iq1
13 RTS +RxD
14 -RxD -RTS
15 RTxC -TRx
16 RxD
17 RTxC RS485-
18 GND GND GND GND
19 -TxD -RTxC
20 DTR -DCD
21 -Iq1 -RxD
22 P5 P5 P5 P5
23 P5 P5 P5 P5
24 TRxC -Iq2
25 N15 N15 N15 N15
26
Table 6-6 Pin assignment of connector X5
Communications support modules
6-40 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
6.8.7 Technical data
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 22 x 70 x 184
Weight: 0.2 kg
The power supply (+5V, +15V and -15V) is established via the 48-pole plug
connector X1 to CS7.
+5 V 0,4 A
+15 V 20 mA
-15V 20 mA
When calculating the total current drain of the communications module, the
current drain, if relevant, of the inserted interface module must be taken
into account.
General data
Power supply
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-41
Edition 12.2004
6
6.9 Communication modules SS5, SS52
SS5: 6DD1688-0AE0
SS52: 6DD1688-0AE2
SS5 SS52
Master interface for
PROFIBUS-FMS (SINEC L2-FMS),
FMS is a utility-oriented client/server
communications
• Master- or slave interface for
PROFIBUS-DP (SINEC L2-DP)
including the „shared input“, SYNC,
FREEZE functions
• MPI (multiple-point protocol; for
SIMATIC S7/M7)
The communications module is a module which is inserted into the CS7
support module. The CS7 support module, the communications module and
its selected receptacle are configured using HWConfig. A maximum of 3
communication modules can be inserted in each CS7.
Data is transferred with the CPU modules via a 16 kbyte dual port RAM,
which is located on the CS7 support module.
Connector X5 has the following interfaces:
• PROFIBUS interface with RS 485 format with electrical isolation
• 5V power supply for the Optical Link Modules OLM
with electrical isolation (floating)
• SS52: Parameterizing- and diagnostics interface with RS 232 format
(for COM PROFIBUS)
PROFIBUS is connected at connector X5:
• directly with the SINEC L2 bus connector
• via an SINEC L2 bus terminal;
in this case, the drop cable capacitance must be taken into account
depending on the baud rate
The SINEC L2 bus terminal as well as the SINEC L2 bus connector have
terminating resistors which can be switched-in.
Order No.
Description
Plug-in CS7
module
Interfaces
PROFIBUS
connection
Communications support modules
6-42 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
6.9.1 Supplementary components
• SINEC L2 bus terminal RS 485, 1.5 m connecting cable
• SINEC L2 bus terminal RS 485, 3 m connecting cable
• SINEC L2 bus connector RS 485
• SINEC L2 optical bus terminals PF/SF
Example of a cable:
Designation Order No.
connecting cable (Profibus) 6XV1 830-0AH10
bus connector 6ES7 972-0BA40-0XA0
For further information, refer to:
− SINEC Catalog IK10
− SIMATIC S5/S7 Catalog
− Equipment Manual "SIMATIC S5 ET200 distributed peripheral
system"
A COM database must be generated and loaded in the SS5 using the
COMSS5 program so that the SS5 can be used.
COMSS5 can run on
− PG programmers under S5-DOS, or
− PC with S5-DOS emulation or COM adapter
The database is, for example, loaded into the SS5 via PROFIBUS using the
CP5412 PC plug-in card (PCMCIA).
To operate the SS52 as master, a COM database must be generated, using
the COM PROFIBUS (or COM ET200) program, and loaded into the SS52.
The program runs on a PC under Windows.
The database is loaded into the SS52 via
• PROFIBUS
(with PC PROFIBUS card CP5411, CP5511 or
MPI card or interface)
• COM1/2 interface of the PC and RS 232 parameterizing/diagnostics
interface of the SS52 with „SS52load“ driver program.
COM PROFIBUS must also be ordered if SS52 is configured as master:
Order No.: 6ES5 895-6SE12 (German)
The driver program SS52load is included in COM PROFIBUS from V3.1 or
can be obtained at no charge from Siemens via the Intranet:
ftp://www.erlf80.asi.siemens.de/SIMADYN_D/html/treiber.htm
Bus connection
SS5
parameterization
SS52
parameterization
Drive program
„SS52load“
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-43
Edition 12.2004
6
We are preparing an Internet page for SIMADYN D.
6.9.2 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity
The front panel of the communications module must be connected to the
front panel of the CS7 using the cables provided with the CS7.
The screen of the data transfer cable (bus cable) must be grounded to a
grounding rail through the largest possible surface area where the cable
enters the equipment.
In addition, the screen in the connector housing must be connected to the
housing. The connector must be tightly screwed to the communications
module.
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
„General technical data“
6.9.3 Diagnostics LED
Each receptacle of the CS7 support module has 2 LEDs, which allow
diagnostics of the associated communications module (operating- and
error/fault conditions).
LEDs on CS7 Significance for SS5
Green
H10 / H20 / H30
Yellow
H11 / H21 / H31
Dark Dark Processor not initialized
Dark Lit Without database at the bus;
COMSS5 must be parameterized
Dark Flickers No database, with bus activity;
COMSS5 must be parameterized
Slow
flash
Dark Initialization erroneous;
COMSS5 database erroneous
Fast
flash
Dark Initialization phase 1
Lit Dark Initialization phase 2
Lit Lit Correctly connected at the bus; presently
no bus activity
Lit Flickers Bus activity
LED Green
H10 / H20 / H30
Yellow
H11 / H21 / H31
Dark CPU stopped No bus operation (initialization
phase)
Flashing, 5 Hz Fatal error:
Read-out the error codes at
Error on the bus,
e. g. short-circuit:
Grounding the
front panel with
CS7
Cable
screening
Other information
CS7 LED for SS5
CS7 LED for SS52
Communications support modules
6-44 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
function block @CSPRO and
contact the SIMADYN
Hotline
Check the bus cable and other
bus nodes
Flashing, 1 Hz Initialize the connection to
the associated CPU module
(@CSPRO);
check @CSPRO configuring;
COM database not available
or inactive (during download)
Flashing, 0.5
Hz
- CFC- and COM configuring do
not match;
bus operation possible with
some restrictions
Lit Initialization O.K. Bus operation O.K.
Additional LEDs are available on SS5/SS52; however, they are only visible
when the module is inserted in an adapter card:
LEDs on SS5 Significance for SS5
D1 No function
D2 No function
D3 Off / on:
Flickers / glows:
Not transmitting;
PROFIBUS interface transmitting data
D4 Off / on:
Flickers / glows:
Not receiving;
PROFIBUS interface receiving data
LEDs SS52 Significance for SS52
H1 On PROFIBUS interface operational
Off PROFIBUS interface not operational
6.9.4 Connector assignment X5
PIN Designation Function
LED on SS5
LED on SS52
SS5:
Communications support modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-45
Edition 12.2004
6
PIN Designation Function
1 - -
2 - -
3 RS485 + Receive- and transmit signal + (corresponding to data
B)
4 RTS Request to send
5 M5EXT External ground; to supply OLMs
6 P5EXT 5V external; to supply OLMs
7 - -
8 RS485 - Receive- and transmit signal - (corresponding to data
A)
9 RTS Request to send
Table 6-7 SS5: Pin assignment of the 9-pin SUB D socket connector X5
Communications support modules
6-46 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 12.2004
Pin Designation Explanation
1 RS 232:
Ground
For „SS52load“; (for SS52 from edition, approx. 7.97!)
2 RS 232: TxD For „SS52load“: Transmit signal
3 RS485 + PROFIBUS: Receive- and transmit signal +
(corresponding to data B)
4 RTS Request to send
(to drive an OLM; „1“ when transmitting; as for pin 9)
5 M5EXT External ground; to supply OLMs
6 P5EXT External P5; to supply OLMs
7 RS 232: RxD For „SS52load“: Receive signal
8 RS485 - PROFIBUS: Receive- and transmit signal -
(corresponding to data A)
9 RTS Request to send
(to drive the OLM; „1“ when transmitting; as for pin 4)
Table 6-8 SS52: Pin assignment of the 9-pin SUB D socket connector X5
6.9.5 Technical data
Dimensions (W x H x D) 70 x 184 x 22 mm
Weight 0.2 kg
The power supply (+5V, +15V and -15V) is established via the 48-pin plug
connector X1 to CS7.
+5 V SS5: max. 0,4 A
SS52: max. 0,7 A
+15 V max. 10 mA
-15 V max. 10 mA
SS52:
General data
Power supply
Technology subrack
7-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
7.1 Technology subrack SRT400
6DD1682-0CG0
The subrack SRT400 has 2 slots to accept
• 1 or 2 technology modules T400
• SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES communication modules
− CB1 (PROFIBUS-DP)
− CB2 (CAN)
− SCB1 (binary and analog inputs/outputs connected to SCI1/2 via fiber-
optic cable)
− SCB2 (USS, Peer-to-Peer)
• input voltage: 115 / 230 V
• output voltage:
− + 5 V, +/- 15 V for modules
− 24 V DC for binary inputs/outputs
• metal housing, closed at all sides
• wall mounting
7.2 Technology module T400
7.2.1 General features
6DD1606-0AD0
The technology module T400 has a range of comprehensive peripheral
functions (inputs/outputs) on the module. This allows it to be used by itself to
realize favorably-priced smaller applications for drives and controls. It
represents an innovated T300.
As far as the backplane bus and module format, it is designed as option
module for use in the SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES 6SE70/71 (FC, SC)
drive converters.
A high-performance coupling to the basic control module of MASTER
DRIVES („BASE BOARD“ CU) is established via its dual port RAM.
Further it can also be used in the SRT400 subrack(„Technology Box“).
Here, it can be used together with a second T400 or a MASTER DRIVES
communications module („COM BOARD“).
It is configured on a Windows 95-PC with SIMATIC STEP7 (HWConfig) and
CFC.
Order No.
Description
Features
Order No.
Description
Technology subrack
Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-3
Edition 03.2001
7
• 2 analog outputs
• 5 analog inputs
• 2 binary outputs
• 4 bi-directional binary inputs/outputs
• 8 binary inputs, of which a maximum of 4 can be used to call-up interrupt
tasks
• 2 incremental encoder connections with zero pulse
• 2 coarse pulse connections to suppress zero pulses;
rough pulses can be optionally used as binary input
• 2 absolute value encoder connections (SSI/EnDat interface);
absolute value encoder connection 2, optionally to serial interface 2!
• Serial interface 1 for
− download and service with DUST1 protocol(RS 232) or
− USS protocol (RS 485)
• Serial interface 2 (RS 485), optionally to absolute value encoder
connection 2 for
USS (master or slave) or peer-to-peer
• The module is configured by downloading data into the permanently
inserted flash EPROM (the EPROM is soldered-in)
• MASTER DRIVES operator control panel OP1S and SIMOVIS can be
connected via USS slave for parameterization (for applications without
MASTER DRIVES BASE-BOARD (CU), e. g. in the SRT400)
• 2*T400 can be used in the SRT400 subrack
• Selectable T400 synchronizing from the BASE- or COM BOARD,
synchronizing signals can be output to the BASE- and COM BOARD;
• Dual port RAM interface to MASTER DRIVES
BASE BOARD, CU and
interface to the dual port RAM on a communications module (COM
BOARD CB)
• 32-bit RISC processor, 32 MHz
• 2Mbyte Flash for compressed program code.
• 4Mbyte DRAM for the de-compressed (unzipped) program which can be
run
• 32 kbyte permanent change memory (EEPROM)
(e.g. for fuzzy control)
• 4 kbyte dual port RAM
Inputs/outputs
Functional features
Features,
electronics
Technology subrack
7-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
A socket for a 28 pin EPLD device (ALTERA) is provided on the module for
copy-protecting the user program („Hardlock-PAL“).
Using a special function block, this EPLD block can be checked and the
program execution stopped if it has the incorrect code or no code.
Further information on request.
7.2.2 Mechanical design, terminals
• The T400 can be used at slot 2 in the MASTER DRIVES electronics box
(outer right!). The PROFIBUS-DP interface (CB1) or CAN bus (CB2) can
be used at slot 3.
The connection to the baseboard at slot 1 and to the expansion board
("COMBOARD") at slot 3 is established via two 64-pin plug connectors.
• The PC board is 100 mm * 233.35 mm. The maximum component height
above the PC board is 14 mm.
• All of the input and output terminals are located at the front of the
module. MINI-COMBICON plug connectors from the Phönix company are
used.
• 55 terminals (five blocks of 11) are located at the foremost edge of the
module.
• Several terminals are assigned twice as a result of the restricted space.
The actual function is selected using a switch or is configured.
• Operation without fan is possible for a 55°C ambient temperature!.
• The backplane bus wiring in the SRT400 technology box is designed so
that two T400 can be used. In this case, connector X2 (below) of the
lefthand slot is connected with connector X1 (top) of the righthand slot.
7.2.3 Incremental encoder with coarse- and fine-pulse evaluation
• 2 incremental encoder inputs, with tracks A, B, and zero pulse of which
− encoder 1 for HTL signal level
− encoder 2 for either HTL or differential signals (RS422);
• The pulses for encoder 1 (tracks A, B, zero pulse) can be optionally
retrieved from the BASE BOARD via the backplane bus („incremental
encoder simulation“ of the CUx; as TTL signal level).
The pulse source is selected by configuring the speed actual value block
NAV.
• Max. input frequency 1MHz
• Selectable, direction of rotation-dependent evaluation of the zero pulses
Software
protection
Incremental
encoder
Technology subrack
Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-5
Edition 03.2001
7
A coarse/fine (zero) pulse evaluation is provided to suppress noise- or
bounce pulses for synchronous- and positioning tasks.
The coarse pulse enables a window for the fine pulse. Generally, coarse-
and fine pulse are defined by the mechanical design of the machine
(e.g. cams). The smoothing time of the coarse pulse input is approx. 1 ms
(as for binary inputs). The fine pulse has no smoothing time.
A differentiation is made between the following situations when evaluating
the coarse- and fine pulses:
The evaluation signal is generated, if...
Case
1
A fine pulse is received; the coarse pulse is not taken into
account; (also for disturbances/noise on the fine pulse)
Case
2
Coarse- and fine pulse have an H signal level, however only 1
evaluation signal per coarse pulse (fine faults/noise are
suppressed)
Case
3
Coarse- and fine pulse have an H signal level,
fine pulse noise is not suppressed.
Case
4
After deleting the coarse pulse, a positive fine pulse edge was
identified.
Additional fine pulses (noise) are suppressed!
Case
5
Coarse pulse is inactive (L signal level) and fine pulses are
active (H signal level),
the fine pulse noise is not suppressed!
Case 1 Case 2 Case 4 Case 5
Coarse pulse
Fine pulse
Evaluation signal
Case 3
Fig. 7-1 Coarse- and fine-pulse evaluation
7.2.3.1 Pulse encoder 2
Pulse encoders with different signal levels can be connected at encoder
input 2:
• RS422
• HTL± (± 3V)
• HTL (3V ... 8V)
Coarse / fine pulse
evaluation
Technology subrack
7-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
• TTL (0V ... 5V)
The setting is made using the DIL switches S2/1 - S2/8
ON
23456781
Fig. 7-2 Switch S2
Track signals A and B are set according to the following table:
Significance Switch S2 Setting Significance Switch S2 Setting
TTL RS422 1 ON TTL (0V ... 5V) 1 ON
2 ON 2 ON
3 ON 3 OFF
HTL± (±3V) 1 OFF HTL (3V ... 8V) 1 OFF
2 OFF 2 OFF
3 OFF 3 OFF
The zero impulse can be switched indepenent from Track A or B:
TTL RS422 4 ON TTL (0V ... 5V) 4 ON
5 ON 5 OFF
HTL± (±3V) 4 OFF HTL (3V ...8V) 1 OFF
5 ON 2 OFF
For differential signals, bus terminating resistors can be switched-in via
switch S2/6 - 8:
Significance Switch S2
Track A 6
Track B 7
Zero pulse 8
The terminating resistors are switched-out in the OFF setting; they are
switched-in in the ON setting.
The switches can only be changed when the module has been withdrawn.
The switches are not accessible when the module is inserted.
Technology subrack
Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-7
Edition 03.2001
7
7.2.4 Absolute value encoders
The T400 has up to 2 synchronous-serial interfaces for multi-turn absolute
value encoders:
• SSI- and EnDat protocol (according to the Heidenhain company)
• Selectable cycle between 100 kHz and 2 MHz
• Either dual- or Gray-, or Gray-excess code can be selected
However, terminals 72 - 75 can only be alternatively used as
− second synchronous-serial interface ("absolute value encoder 2") or
− peer-to-peer or USS protocol
It is possible to simultaneously use, for example, peer-to-peer and "absolute
value encoder 1" (terminals 76-79).
7.2.5 Serial interfaces
T400 has 2 serial interfaces:
The following is realized via interface 1,
• the program is downloaded
• service („CFC in the test mode", "basic service") for start-up
(DUST1 protocol).
Baud rate: 19.2 kbaud
Optionally, the USS protocol (master/slave), to connect a MASTER
DRIVES OP1S operator control unit or SIMOVIS can be set per hardware
switch on the T400.
Interface 1 has both physical interfaces (can be optionally used!):
• RS 232 for PC coupling (download, service)
• RS 485 (2 wire) e.g. for USS to the operator control panel
connection (OPx, SIMOVIS) or to higher-level
(master) systems (SIMATIC); incl. terminating
resistors which can be switched-in
Interface 2 is a mix asynchronous and synchronous interface with RS 485
data transfer signal level:
• Peer-to-peer
with full duplex, 4-wire connection
• USS protocol (master/slave)
with half-duplex, 2-wire connection
The following baud rates can be set:
„Service“
interface 1
Interface 2
Technology subrack
7-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
9.6 kbaud
19.2 kbaud
38.4 kbaud
93.75 kbaud
187.5 kbaud
7.2.5.1 Bus termination
Bus terminating resistors for serial interfaces 1- and 2 can be switched-in via
switch S1/1-S1/8 if the T400 is located at the beginning or end of the bus.
Terminals Switch S1
Serial interface 1 70/71 1,2
Serial interface 2
(2-conductor, 4-
conductor)
74/75 3,4
Serial interface 2
(4-conductor)
72/73 5,6
ON
23456781
Fig. 7-3 Switch S1
The terminating resistors are switched-in in the ON setting.
The switch settings can only be changed after the module has been
withdrawn. These switches are not accessible if the module is inserted.
Switch S7 has no function.
7.2.5.2 Communications switch
Switch S1/8 toggles between the service- and USS protocol at serial
interface 1. More detailed information can be taken from the description of
the USS protocol.
Technology subrack
Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-9
Edition 03.2001
7
7.2.6 Synchronizing possibilities
The T400 offers various ways to process and transfer synchronizing signals.
The processing possibilities are listed in the following diagram. The three
selector switches indicated, are set by appropriate configuring.
T0GATE
Port A/4
Com board
X2 / A26
Base board
X1 / A26
L_INT_DPR_PT
Port A/5
L_INT_DPR_CU
L_INT_CU_DPR
Com board
X2 / B25
Base board
X1 / B25
L_INT_PT_DPR
T0OUT
SYNC_COM
SYNC_BASE
Inputs
Outputs
Steer
Processor
Fig. 7-4 Synchronizing possibilities
The basic cycle of the T400 can be taken from three various sources (can
be configured in HWConfig):
• Basic cycle time of the T400 (standard)
• Synchronizing signal of the BASE BOARDs (L_INT_CU_DPR (connector
X1/B25) for T0GATE)
• Synchronizing signal of the COM BOARDs (L_INT_DPR_PT (connector
X2/A26) for T0GATE)
Thus, a cycle from the CBX can synchronize the T400 and BASE BOARD
(CU).
Configurable interrupt tasks can also be called using the synchronizing
signals from BASE- or COM BOARDs (ports A/4, A/5).
The T400 can supply BASE- and COM BOARD synchronizing signals, which
come from the following three sources and can be selected by appropriately
configuring:
• Basic cycle time of the T400 (T0OUT of MFB1)
• Directly connecting synchronizing signals from the BASE- or COM
BOARD to the other module
• In an FP with a special FB-generated synchronizing signal
(SYNC_BASE, SYNC_COM)
Synchronizing
possibilities
Sync signals for
BASE- and
COM BOARD
Technology subrack
7-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
BASE BOARD-T400, synchronized via X2/B25 --> X1/B25 TECH BOARD-
T400, and
TECH BOARD-T400 synchronized via X1/A26 --> X2/A26 BASE BOARD-
T400;
7.2.7 Parameters
The I/O of the function blocks as well as the parameters can be defined
(configured) on the T400. Thus, these I/O can be read and changed using
the "parameter mechanism" via
• Dual port RAM
• PROFIBUS (CB1)
• USS protocol (for operator control device, SIMOVIS)
2000 parameters can be configured, whereby a differentiation can be made
between those at the operator control panel (and SIMOVIS), and the basic
drive converter parameters („r“ and „P“) using one of the two prefixes
• „H“
• „L“
7.2.8 Terminal assignment
All of the signals are connected at 55 terminals, which are accessible from
the front.
They are distributed over 5 11-pin MINI-COMBICON plug connectors in a
3.5 mm grid dimension (connectors X5 - X9):
Synchronizing
2 T400:
Technology subrack
Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-11
Edition 03.2001
7
T400 terminal assignment Con. Con.-pin Terminal
+ 24 V external (for binary inputs and outputs) X5 1 45
Bi-directional binary input and output 1 2 46
Bi-directional binary input and output 2 3 47
Bi-directional binary input and output 3 4 48
Bi-directional binary input and output 4 5 49
Ground, binary inputs and outputs 6 50
Binary output 1 7 51
Binary output 2 8 52
Binary input 1 (interrupt-capable) 9 53
Binary input 2 (interrupt-capable) 10 54
Binary input 3 (interrupt-capable) 11 55
Binary input 4 (interrupt-capable) X6 1 56
Binary input 5 2 57
Binary input 6 3 58
Binary input 7 4 59
Binary input 8 5 60
Ground, binary inputs and outputs 6 61
Encoder 2 : Track A ( HTL) Encoder 2: Track A+ ( RS422) 7 62
Encoder 2: Track B ( HTL) Encoder 2: Track B+ ( RS422) 8 63
Encoder 2: Zero pulse (HTL) Encoder 2: Zero pulse +
(RS422)
9 64
Encoder 2: Coarse pulse 10 65
Encoder 2 ground 11 66
Serial interface 1: Rx-RS232 X7 1 67
Serial interface 1: Tx-RS232 2 68
Serial interface ground 3 69
Serial interface . 1: Tx/Rx-RS485+ 4 70
Serial interface 1: Tx/Rx-RS485- 5 71
Serial interface 2: Rx-RS485+ Absolut-Encoder 2: Data+ 6 72
Serial interface 2: Rx-RS485- Absolut-Encoder 2: Data- 7 73
Serial interface 2: Tx (Rx)-RS485+ Absolut-Encoder 2: Pulse+ 8 74
Serial interface 2: Tx (Rx)-RS485- Absolut-Encoder 2: Pulse- 9 75
Absolut-Encoder 1: Data+ 10 76
Absolut-Encoder 1: Data- 11 77
Absolut-Encoder 1: Pulse+ X8 1 78
Absolut-Encoder 1: Pulse- 2 79
+ 15 V -Encoder Power Supply (max. 100 mA) 3 80
Increm.-Encoder 1: Track A 4 81
Increm.-Encoder 1: Track B 5 82
Increm.-Encoder 1: Zero pulse 6 83
Increm.-Encoder 1: Coarse pulse 7 84
Increm.-Encoder 1 Ground 8 85
Increm.-Encoder 2: Track A- (with RS422) 9 86
Increm.-Encoder 2: Track B- (with RS422) 10 87
Increm.-Encoder 2: Zero pulse- (with RS422) 11 88
Ground, analog inputs and outputs X9 1 89
Analog input 1 Analog input 1+ 2 90
Analog input 1- 3 91
Analog input 2 Analog input 2+ 4 92
Analog input 2- 5 93
Analog input 3 6 94
Analog input 4 7 95
Analog input 5 8 96
Analog input 1 9 97
Technology subrack
7-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
Analog input 2 10 98
Ground, analog inputs and outputs 11 99
All grounds are connected mutually via inductivity and with electronics
ground.
The grounds connections of
interfaces 1 and 2
analog inputs/outputs
binary inputs/outputs.
incremental encoders 1 and 2
are connected to the T400 electronics ground through 0 Ohm resistors,
reactors and capacitors which can be soldered-out. For production-related
reasons, the 0 Ohm resistor is an SMD device (not separately connected)
and when required must be soldered-out (to interrupt the electrical
connection)!
7.2.9 Technical data
No. of slots occupied 1
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220
Weight approx. 0.6 kg
The T400 requires the following voltages at the upper backplane bus
connector X1:
Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain
+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 1000 mA
+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 140 mA + encoder load
(max. 100 mA, electronically limited)
-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 140 mA
24 V (external) 20 V 30 V 150 mA + binary output current
Note:
Grounding
General data
Power supply
Technology subrack
Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-13
Edition 03.2001
7
No. 5
Type Of which, 2 are differential inputs,
3 unipolar;
non-floating
Input voltage range -10 V +/- 4 LSB to +10 V +/- 4 LSB
(1 LSB = 4.88 mV)
Input resistance 20 kOhm
Input filter 3 dB transition frequency: 1.5 kHz
Resolution 12 bits
Absolute accuracy Typ. 10 bits over the complete temperature
range
Linearity + 1 LSB
Offset error + 3 LSB
Max. conversion time 15 µs
Differential input resistance > 20 kOhm
Hardware smoothing 5 µs
No. 2
Output voltage range -10 V to +10 V
Output current +/- 10 mA
Resolution 12 bits
Monotony 11 bits over the complete temperature range
Absolute accuracy Typ. 10 bits over the complete temperature
range
Short-circuit protection to
ground
Yes
Slew rate of the output Approx. 3.4 V/µs
Offset- and amplification
error (gain error)
+ 3 LSB
No. 10 and max. 4 bi-directional non-floating
Input voltage 24 V DC nominal voltage
for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or inputs open-circuit
for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V
Input current
for 0 signal 0 mA
for 1 signal 8 mA typ.
Input smoothing 500 µs
Analog inputs
Analog outputs
Binary inputs
Technology subrack
7-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
No. 2 and
max. 4 bi-directional;
non-floating
Power supply voltage From external
nominal value 24 V DC
perm. range +20 V to 30 V including ripple
briefly +35 V, max. 0.5 s
Output current for 1 signal
nominal current 50 mA (also corresponds to max. value)
Short-circuit protection Electronic and thermal
Limiting inductive switch-off
voltages
Supply voltage + 1 V
Residual current 20 µA for 0 signal
Signal level
for 0 signal Max. 3 V
for 1 signal Supply voltage - 2.5 V
Switching delay Max. 15 µs
No. of encoders Total max. 2
Type Differential inputs, electrical isolation (floating)
(optocoupler)
Input voltage range Differential voltage -30 V to +30 V
Input voltage (for 15 mA load)
for 0 signal -30 V to +4 V
for 1 signal +8 V to + 30 V
Input current Approx. 15 mA (electronically limited)
Pulse frequency Max.. 1 MHz (track frequency)
Phase difference of the track
signals
Independent of the pulse frequency at least 200
ns
Input filter Can be configured via software (function block)
Binary outputs
15 V incremental
encoder
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-1
Edition 04.2011
8
8 Program memory modules / Interface modules
8.1 Program memory modules MS5, MS51, MS52 8-2
8.2 Interface module SE13.1 8-4
8.3 Interface module SE26.1 8-7
8.4 Interface module SB10 8-11
8.5 Interface module SB60 8-17
8.6 Interface module SB61 8-22
8.7 Interface module SB70 8-29
8.8 Interface module SB71 8-35
8.9 Interface modules SU10, SU11, SU12, SU13 8-41
Overview
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.1 Program memory modules MS5, MS51, MS52
MS5: 6DD1610-0AH0
MS51: 6DD1610-0AK0
MS52: 6DD1610-0AH2
The MS5, MS51 and MS52 program memory modules are used to save
the processor program, configured by the user with HWConfig and CFC
(including the operating system).
The program memory module is inserted in the module receptacle of the
CPU module provided and the user program can be downloaded in two
ways:
• via a PCMCIA card, integrated in the PC (offline loading) (PC card)
• directly from the PC via a serial communications link into the memory
module inserted in the CPU module
(online loading)
The size of the software to be loaded into the memory module ("zipped"
to approximately 50%), and the size of the available program memory in
the CFC is displayed under the following memory item:
Target system / load / info
The differences in the application and the memory expansion of the MS5,
MS51 and MS52 program memory modules are shown in the following
table:
Application MS5 MS51 MS52
Flash memory to store the configuring
software
2 Mbyte 4 Mbyte 8 Mbyte
EEPROM for operating parameters which
can be changed
8 Kbyte 8 Kbyte 8 Kbyte
Table 8-1 Application areas of the program memory modules
NOTE The flash memory is a non-volatile memory which can be electrically
programmed and erased.
PCMCIA and JEIDA
industry standard
68 pin memory card
Write
protect
switch
Order Nos.
Description
Installation /
programming
Program size
Memory overview
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-3
Edition 04.2011
8
8.1.1 Technical data
Dimensions (W x H x D) 54 x 85.6 x 3.3 mm
Weight 30 g
MS5 MS51 MS52
Power supply +5 V +5 V +5 V
Current drain 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA
Connection to JEIDA/PCMCIA 68 Pin
Access time 200 ns
General data
Power supply
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.2 Interface module SE13.1
6DD1681-0BD1
The interface module is used to adapt passive signals via voltage divider
and T elements. It includes
• 6 T elements which can be connected/configured using solder pins,
and
• 2 voltage dividers which can be freely configured
• housing for snapping-on to mounting rail
• 3-row, 3 x 16-pin terminal block
• 6 configurable T elements
• 2 voltage dividers with spindle potentiometers which can be freely
dimensioned
• solder pins to connect components with axially-located connections
• labeling field for the user to identify his plant/system
ZO
ZE ZA
ZM
Input Outpu
t
GND
Screen
Fig. 8-1 Connecting the T element on the interface module
Order No.
Description
Module design
T element
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-5
Edition 04.2011
8
Eingang 1
Ausgang
R-1 R-2
U
2K2
Eingang 2
Schirm
Fig. 8-2 Wiring the voltage divider on the interface module
8.2.1 Application information
The circuits on the interface module are defined by the user. Here are
some of the examples of the circuits which can be implemented:
• filters:
− low-pass
− high-pass
− bandpass
− bandstop
− RC element
• voltage divider
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
„General technical data“
8.2.2 Technical data
Mounting system Can be snapped onto mounting rails
Dimensions (W x H x D) 77 x 112.5 x 72.5 mm
Weight 0.23 kg
Voltage divider, nominal value 1.76 to 2.64 kΩ
Power supply Max. +33 V DC
Current drain Max. 15 mA
Maximum rating 500 mW
Voltage divider
Other information
General data
Power supply
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.2.3 Connector assignment X1
Terminal Designation Terminal Designation Terminal Designation
1 Input volt. divider 1 21 GND volt. divider 1 41 Screen volt. divider 1
2 Output " 22 " 42 "
3 Input volt. divider 2 23 GND volt. divider 2 43 Screen volt. divider 2
4 Output " 24 " 44 "
5 Input channel 1 25 GND channel 1 45 Screen channel 1
6 Output " 26 " 46 "
7 Input channel 2 27 GND channel 2 47 Screen channel 2
8 Output " 28 " 48 "
9 Input channel 3 29 GND channel 3 49 Screen channel 3
10 Output " 30 " 50 "
11 Input channel 4 31 GND channel 4 51 Screen channel 4
12 Output " 32 " 52 "
13 Input channel 5 33 GND channel 5 53 Screen channel 5
14 Output " 34 " 54 "
15 Input channel 6 35 GND channel 6 55 Screen channel 6
16 Output " 36 " 56 "
Table 8-2 Connector assignment of X1
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-7
Edition 04.2011
8
8.3 Interface module SE26.1
6DD1681-0CG1
The module is used to convert analog signal quantities and provide
electrical isolation (floating). The module filters analog signals using a
low-pass filter.
• housing for snapping-on to mounting rails
• differential input
• short-circuit proof output
• operating message via LED
• labeling field for module identification
The module is supplied with 24 V DC. A DC/DC converter generates
electrically isolated +/-15 V DC voltages from this 24 V DC supply. These
supply the isolating- and signal amplifiers at the input. The 24 V DC
power supply and the analog output are electrically connected.
A second order Butterworth low pass filter filters the applied signal. The
frequency characteristics and the transfer characteristics are specified in
Chapter 1.6.
A differential amplifier is used as the input circuitry. Thus, parallel
voltage- or serial current measurements are possible. This allows analog
signals of the plant/system to be processed in electrically-isolated
(floating) SIMADYN D subracks.
Order No.
Description
Module design
Features
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.3.1 Application information
The module has screw terminals to connect the input- and output signals.
SIMADYN D is connected via an SU10, SU11 interface module which is
connected to an input/output module (EA12) or an expansion module
(IT41) using a ribbon cable.
Fig. 8-3 Connecting example for the interface module SE26.1
Example
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-9
Edition 04.2011
8
8.3.2 Technical data
Mounting system Can be snapped onto mounting rails
Dimensions (W x H x D) 135 x 77 x 59
Weight 0.2 kg
External power supply +24 V DC
Range +20 to +30 V DC
Briefly (t<500 ms) 1,5 x Vrated
Current drain at 24 V 170 mA at the rated output current
Signal level
input +/- 10 V
output +/- 10 V
Input resistance 100 kΩ
Signal level +10 V
Output load resistor >1 kOhm
Zero point error 1) + 2 mV
Maximum error +10 mV
Push-pull output 5 mA
Transfer frequency range:
0 to 1 kHz ⏐A/AO⏐ = 0 dB
1 to 3 kHz ⏐A/AO⏐ ε 3 dB
1) 25 °C ambient temperature
8.3.3 Connector assignment
Terminal block -X2 Terminal block -X3
Terminal Designation Terminal Designation
031 Pos. input signal 04 Output signal
032 Neg. input signal 05 Output ground
05 Input ground L+ P24 power supply Pext
1S Push-pull output 1S Connected with terminal
X2/3S
2S Terminal connected with
X2/05 input ground
2S Connected with terminal
X3/05
3S Connected with X3/1S M M24 power supply Mext
Table 8-3 Connections of terminal blocks X2 and X3
General data
Power supply
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.3.4 Diagram
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Fig. 8-4 Voltage- and frequency characteristic of interface module SE26.1
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-11
Edition 04.2011
8
8.4 Interface module SB10
6DD1681-0AE2
The interface module outputs binary signals from SIMADYN D /
SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components to the plant/system or
receives binary signals from the plant/system and transfers these to
SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components. The
connection to SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458-
components is established through ribbon cables and on the
plant/system side, via terminals. There is no electrical isolation between
the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components side and
the plant/system side.
• housing which can be snapped onto mounting rails
• ribbon cable connector (X1):
− 8 pins for binary signals, 24 V DC
− 2 pins for 1P, 1M power supply voltages
• connector (X2), 2x 8 pin:
− 8 terminals for 24 V DC binary signals
− 8 terminals for the reference point (1M, 1P is also possible)
• 1 terminal pair X3: 1P and 1M
• double test socket X5: 1P(+), 1M(G)
• diagnostic LEDs
The power supply on the SIMADYN D side is fed-in at terminal X3:
Terminal X3 Voltage at the SIMADYN D side
1P
1M
+24 V
0 V
To connect the power supply use accessory
SM11 power supply connector for interface modules
(Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0)
The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².
NOTE To connect the power supply see “User manual FM 458-1 DP” chapter
“Installation and EMC guideline”.
The SIMADYN-side power supply is displayed using a green LED (P).
The SIMADYN-side power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault
condition).
Order No.
Description
Module design
Power supply on
the SIMADYN D
side
Green LED
Red LED
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
Voltages 1P and 1M can be used, via the double test socket (G; +) to
simulate an input signal for SIMADYN D.
Double test socket X5 Voltage
+ (1P from X3)
G (1M from X3)
+24 V
0 V
!
WARNUNG Explosion Hazard
No connections are to be made to X5 unless the area is known to be
non-hazardous.
8.4.1 Signals
Each status of the 8 signals is displayed using a yellow LED (1...8).
There is a screw connection for each signal at the two terminal strips X2:
• terminals 1 to 8 for binary signals
• terminals 51 to 58 for reference points
The reference points of the signals are either at 1M potential or 1P
potential. The polarity is selected on the module using a solder link:
X2
51..58
X5
1P
1W
1M
X3
1P
1M
G
+
Fig. 8-5 Solder link to set the signal reference points
NOTE Link 1M-1W is inserted in the factory
Test socket
Yellow LED
Reference potential
of the signals
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-13
Edition 04.2011
8
8.4.2 Application information
The interface module can be mounted both vertically and horizontally.
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
„General technical data“
A typical application is shown in the following diagram:
Fig. 8-6 Application example for SB10 interface module at the binary input-,
output module EB11
The binary signals of the plant/system side are connected directly with
the SIMADYN D modules via the interface module. A ribbon cable is
used (refer to the Chapter Plug in cables).
Other information
Example
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.4.3 Technical data
Mounting system Can be snapped onto mounting rails
Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm
Weight Approx. 0.28 kg
ambient temperature for approbations max. 50° C
Description SIMADYN D
Power supply voltage (VV)
at the nominal value
24 V DC
Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC
Briefly t<500 ms 1,5 x Vrated
Current drain
At the nominal value 1) 20 mA
Maximum current per power supply
cable
400 mA
1) LED current drain without the load of the system modules
The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is the power supply
for several interface modules.
No. 8
Nominal voltage value 24 V DC
Maximum current per channel 30 mA
General data
ambient
temperature
Power supply
Binary signals
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-15
Edition 04.2011
8
8.4.4 Connector assignment
To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /
S7-400 FM 458- components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further
informations see the documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /
S7-400 FM 458- components).
Terminal Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Channel 1 (binary input/output 1)
Channel 2 (binary input/output 2)
Channel 3 (binary input/output 3)
Channel 4 (binary input/output 4)
Channel 5 (binary input/output 5)
Channel 6 (binary input/output 6)
Channel 7 (binary input/output 7)
Channel 8 (binary input/output 8)
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set)
Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set)
Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set)
Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set)
Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set)
Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set)
Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set)
Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set)
Table 8-4 Assignment of the binary inputs and outputs of interface module SB10
The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is
0,2mm², the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².
Flat connector X1
Terminal block X2
Conductor cross
section
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.4.5 Block diagram
X1
8
X2
X3
1
9
58
1
2
+
G
8
51
1
F
P
8
1
1P
1W
1M
10
Fig. 8-7 Block diagram of interface module SB10
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-17
Edition 04.2011
8
8.5 Interface module SB60
6DD1681-0AF4
8 binary input signals can be adapted to the signal level of SIMADYN D /
SIMATIC TDC, electrically-isolated (floating) via optocouplers using the
SB60 interface module. The input signal voltage can be 120 V DC or AC.
There is protective separation between the eight binary inputs and the
SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC rack. The eight binary inputs are electrically
isolated with respect to one another.
• housing which can be snapped onto mounting rails
• ribbon cable connector (X1):
− 8 pins for binary outputs
− 2 pins for 1P, 1M
• connector (X2), 2x 12 pins:
− 8 pins for binary inputs 120 V
− 8 pins for the reference point
• 1 terminal pair X3:
− 1P and 1M for the voltage on the SIMADYN D side
• LEDs for diagnostics
• optocouplers to electrically isolate input and output
The power supply at the SIMADYN D side is connected at terminal X3:
Terminal X3 Voltage on the SIMADYN D side
1P
1M
+24 V
0 V
To connect the power supply use accessory
SM11 power supply connector for interface modules
(Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0)
The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².
NOTE To connect the power supply see “User manual FM 458-1 DP” chapter
“Installation and EMC guideline”.
!
WARNUNG Between inputs this interface module have a protective separation
The system side ( rack including 24V power supply ) have a protective
separation from touch dangerous voltage to the process side ( 8 input
signals ).
Order No.
Description
Module design
Power supply on
the SIMADYN D
side
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
The SIMADYN D power supply is indicated using a green LED (P).
The SIMADYN D power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault
condition).
8.5.1 Signals
Signals up to a maximum of 120 V (nominal value) DC or AC can be
connected at the SB60 interface module.
The status of the binary interface module outputs (binary inputs for
SIMADYN D) is indicated using yellow LEDs (1...8).
There are two screw connections for each signal at
terminal strip X2:
• terminals 12, 22, ... up to 82 for binary signals 120 V
• terminals 11, 21, ... up to 81 for the reference point
NOTE To connect the signal lines to the terminals see “User manual FM 458-1
DP” chapter “Installation and EMC guideline”.
8.5.2 Application information
The interface module can only be vertically mounted due to the power
loss which has to be dissipated.
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
„General technical data“
Green LED
Red LED
Yellow LED
Other information
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-19
Edition 04.2011
8
8.5.3 Technical data
Mounting system Can be snapped onto mounting rails
Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm
Weight Approx. 0.32 kg
Nominal power supply voltage
(VV)
24 V DC
Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC
Briefly t<500 ms 1,5 x Vrated
Current drain at the nominal
value
90 mA
The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is the power supply
for several interface modules.
Number 8
Nominal input voltage 120 V AC/DC
‘1 signal’ 98 to 132 V
‘0 signal’ 0 to 33 V 1)
Input current (‘1 signal’) max. 3 mA
Insulation voltage Protective separation provided:
- between inputs and outputs
Electrical isolation provided:
- between input circuits
(with respect to one another)
Test voltage 1125V AC
1) Or open-circuit input
General data
Power supply
Binary inputs
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-20 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.5.4 Connector assignment
To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC
components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further informations see the
documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC components).
Terminal 120 V Channel No.
11
21
31
41
51
61
71
81
Reference
Reference
Reference
Reference
Reference
Reference
Reference
Reference
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
12
22
32
42
52
62
72
82
120 V-input
120 V-Input
120 V-Input
120 V-Input
120 V-Input
120 V-Input
120 V-Input
120 V-Input
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
14
24
34
44
54
64
74
84
nc
nc
nc
nc
nc
nc
nc
nc
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Table 8-5 Assignment of the binary inputs of interface module SB60
The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is
0,2mm², the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².
flat connector X1
Binary inputs,
terminal block X2
Conductor cross
section
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-21
Edition 04.2011
8
8.5.5 Block diagram
IT41
IT42
EB11
SC50
Fig. 8-8 Block diagram of interface module SB60
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-22 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.6 Interface module SB61
6DD1681-0EB3
8 binary DC signals are adapted to the signal level of SIMADYN D /
SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components, electrically isolated
(floating) using the SB61 interface module.
• housing which can be snapped onto mounting rails
• ribbon cable connector (X1):
− 8 pins for binary outputs
− 2 pins for 1P, 1M
• connector (X2), 2x 12 pin:
− 8 terminals for 24 V binary inputs
− 8 terminals for 48 V binary inputs
− 8 terminals for the reference point
• 1 terminal pair X3: 1P,1M (SIMADYN D-side power supply)
• 1 terminal pair X4: 2P, 2M (plant/system-side power supply)
• plug connector for the short-circuit connector
• double test socket X5: 2P (+), 2M (G)
• LED displays for diagnostics
• optocoupler to provide electrical isolation between the input and
output
The SIMADYN D-side power supply is connected at terminal X3:
Terminal X3 Voltage SIMADYN D side
1P
1M
+24 V
0 V
To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply
connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0)
The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².
The SIMADYN D power supply is indicated using a green LED (P).
The SIMADYN D power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault
condition).
Order No.
Description
Module design
Power supply on
the SIMADYN D
side
Green LED
Red LED
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-23
Edition 04.2011
8
8.6.1 Signals
The 24/48 V DC voltage for the plant/system side signals is available at
terminal block X4:
Terminal X4 Voltage, plant/system side
2P
2M
+24/48 V
0 V
To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply
connector for interface modules
(Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0).
The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².
NOTE To connect the power supply see “User manual FM 458-1 DP” chapter
“Installation and EMC guideline”.
The power supply for the plant/system side is available at double test
socket X5 (G; +):
Double test socket X5 Voltage, plant/system side
+ (2P from X4)
G (2M from X4)
+24/48 V
0 V
!
WARNUNG Explosion Hazard
No connections are to be made to X5 unless the area is known to be
non-hazardous.
The status of the 8 signals is displayed, for each signal, using a yellow
LED (1...8).
There are three screw connections on terminal strip X2 for each signal:
• terminals 1 to 8 for 24 V binary signals
• terminals 11 to 18 for 48 V binary signals
• terminals 51 to 58 as reference point
Power supply,
plant/system side
Test socket
Yellow LED
Terminal block for
binary signals
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.6.2 Application information
Plant/system-side signal voltages of 48V or 24V DC can be processed
using the interface module. The plant/system side of the module has 8
electrically isolated input channels. Using short-circuit connectors (X11),
the connection of each channel can be electrically isolated from one
another, or connected to a common reference point:
Plant/system side System side
Electrical
isolation
X2
1/11
SB61
X11
X4
M24V/48V
P24V/48V
51
32
41
2P
2M
Fig. 8-9 Position of the jumpers for inputs which are electrically isolated with respect to
one another
Plant/system side System side
Electrical
isolation
X2
1/11
SB61
X11
X4
M24V/48V
P24V/48V
51
32
41
2P
2M
Fig. 8-10 Position of the jumpers for inputs with common reference potential
!
CAUTION When supplied, all outputs have a common reference potential, i. e.
terminal pair X11 to X18 is equipped with two short-circuit connectors.
Electrically-
isolated inputs
(floating)
Inputs with
common reference
potential
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-25
Edition 04.2011
8
The jumpers (short-circuit connectors) are located in the section of the
housing cover facing away from the LEDs. These are only accessible
after the interface module has been removed.
The potential assignment between the plant- and system side is defined
as follows:
Reference potential of the inputs Position of the short-circuit
connector (jumper)
Inputs are additionally electrically-
isolated with respect to one another
Connector X1n1) :2:3 inserted
Inputs with common reference
potential
Connector X1n :1:2 and X1n :3:4
inserted
1) n = number of input 1 to 8
Table 8-6 Position of the jumpers
NOTE The potential reference can be separately set for each input.
The interface module can only be mounted vertically due to the power
loss which has to be dissipated.
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
„General technical data“
A typical application is shown in the following diagram:
Fig. 8-11 Application example for interface module SB61 at the binary input-, output
module EB11
Position of the
jumpers
Other information
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-26 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.6.3 Technical data
Mounting system Housing for snapping onto mounting
rails
Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm
Weight Approx. 0.32 kg
ambient temperature for approbations max. 50° C
SIMADYN D Plant/system
side 24 V DC
Plant/system side
48 V DC
Power supply
voltage (VV)
24 V DC 24 V DC 48 V DC
Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC 20 to 30 V DC 40 to 60 V DC
Briefly t<500 ms 1.5 x Vrated 1.5 x Vrated 1.5 x Vrated
Current drain at the
nominal value
90 mA 50 mA 50 mA
The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is the power supply
for several interface modules. The maximun current on connector X4 is
2 A, if this is the power supply for several interface modules.
Plant/system
side 24 V DC
Plant/system
side 48 V DC
No. 8 8
Input voltage for
‘1 signal’ 13 to 30 V DC 26 to 60 V DC
‘0 signal’ -3 to +6 V 1) -3 to +12 V 1)
Input current (‘1signal’) 6 mA 6 mA
1) Or open-circuit input
General data
ambient
temperature
Power supply
Binary inputs
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-27
Edition 04.2011
8
8.6.4 Connector assignment
To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /
S7-400 FM 458- components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further
informations see the documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /
S7-400 FM 458- components).
Terminal Inputs, electrically
isolated (floating)
Inputs with
common
reference point
Channel No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+24 V input
+24 V input
+24 V input
+24 V input
+24 V input
+24 V input
+24 V input
+24 V input
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
+48 V input
+48 V input
+48 V input
+48 V input
+48 V input
+48 V input
+48 V input
+48 V input
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Input 24 V/48 V
Input 24 V/48 V
Input 24 V/48 V
Input 24 V/48 V
Input 24 V/48 V
Input 24 V/48 V
Input 24 V/48 V
Input 24 V/48 V
2P(+24 V)
2P(+24 V)
2P(+24 V)
2P(+24 V)
2P(+24 V)
2P(+24 V)
2P(+24 V)
2P(+24 V)
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Table 8-7 Assignment of the binary inputs of interface module SB61
The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is
0,2mm², the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².
flat connector X1
Binary inputs,
terminal block X2
Conductor cross
section
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-28 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.6.5 Block diagram
X2 X1
X3
1
1
2
+
G
11
F
P
8
1
8
1
51
18
8
58
9
10
1
2
4
3
1
2
4
3
X11
X18
P24
M24
1
2
X4
Fig. 8-12 Block diagram of interface module SB61
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-29
Edition 04.2011
8
8.7 Interface module SB70
6DD1681-0AG2
8 binary output signals from SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC are adapted to
the signal level of the plant/system via relays using the SB70 interface
module.
The output signal voltage can be up to max. 120 V DC or AC.
• housing which can be snapped onto mounting rails
• ribbon cable connector (X1):
− 8 pins for binary inputs
− 2 pins for 1P, 1M
• connector (X2), 2x 12pin
− 8 terminals for the NO contact
− 8 terminals for the NC contact
− 8 terminals for the center contact
• 1 terminal pair X3: 1P,1M (power supply on the SIMADYN D side)
• double test socket X5: 1P( + ), 1M ( G )
• LED displays for diagnostic purposes
• relay to provide electrical isolation between the input and output
• PTC thermistor as cable protection after the SIMADYN D-side power
supply
The SIMADYN D power supply is connected at terminal X3:
Terminal X3 Voltage on the SIMADYN D side
1P
1M
+24 V
0 V
To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply
connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0)
The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².
NOTE To connect the power supply see “User manual FM 458-1 DP” chapter
“Installation and EMC guideline”.
Order No.
Description
Module design
Power supply on
the SIMADYN D
side
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-30 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
!
WARNUNG Between outputs this interface module have a protective
separation
The system side ( rack including 24V power supply ) have a protective
separation from touch dangerous voltage to the process side ( 8 output
signals ).
Between outputs they have only an electrical isolation.
The output signals on the process side only have an electrically (
galvanically ) isolation between each other. A mix with safety small
voltage and touch dangerous voltage is not allowed.
The SIMADYN D-side power supply is displayed using a green LED (P).
The SIMADYN D-side power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault
condition).
The SIMADYN D power supply is available at the double test socket X5
(G; +):
Double test socket X5 Voltage, SIMADYN D side
+ (1P of X3)
G (1M of X3)
+24 V
0 V
8.7.1 Signals
The status of the 8 signals is displayed using a yellow LED for each of
the signals (1...8).
There are three screw connections on terminal strip X2 for each signal to
the plant/system side:
• terminals 14, 24 ... up to 84 for NO contact
• terminals 12, 22 ... up to 82 for NC contact
• terminals 11, 21 ... up to 81 as center contact
The relay contact connections are determined as follows:
Quiescent state Connections (screw terminals)
Contact closed (NC contact)
Contact open (NO contact
n2 - n1 1)
n4 - n1
1) n: 1...8 depending on the channel No.
NOTE To connect the power supply see “User manual FM 458-1 DP” chapter
“Installation and EMC guideline”.
Green LED
Red LED
Test socket
Yellow LED
Terminal block for
binary signals
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-31
Edition 04.2011
8
8.7.2 Application information
The interface module can be mounted both vertically and horizontally
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
„General technical data“
A typical application is illustrated in the following diagram:
SIMADYN D side
Plant/system side
Interface
module SB70
Fig. 8-13 Application example for interface module SB70 at binary input-, output module
EB11
The binary inputs of the interface module are connected to the SIMADYN
D outputs via ribbon cables (refer to the Chapter Plug in cables).
Other information
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-32 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.7.3 Technical data
Mounting system Housing can be snapped onto mounting
rails
Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm
Weight Approx. 0.37 kg
Power supply voltage (VV)
nominal value
24 V DC
Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC
Briefly t<500 ms 1,5 x Vrated
Current drain at the nominal value 150 mA
The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is the power supply
for several interface modules.
No. 8
Switching capability of the relay
contacts
120 V AC 2 A
120 V DC 0.4 A
60 V DC 1 A
< 35 V DC 2 A
Switching frequency max 20 Hz
Insulation voltage
Protective separation provided:
- between inputs and outputs
Electrical isolation provided:
- between input circuits
(with respect to one another)
Test voltage 1125V AC
General data
Power supply
Binary outputs
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-33
Edition 04.2011
8
8.7.4 Connector assignment
To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC
components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further informations see the
documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC components).
Terminal 120 V Channel No.
11
21
31
41
51
61
71
81
Center contact
Center contact
Center contact
Center contact
Center contact
Center contact
Center contact
Center contact
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
12
22
32
42
52
62
72
82
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
14
24
34
44
54
64
74
84
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Table 8-8 Assignment of the binary inputs of interface module SB70, terminal block X2
The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is
0,2mm², the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².
flat connector X1
Binary inputs,
terminal block X2
Conductor cross
section
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-34 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.7.5 Block diagram
X1 X2
X3
11
1
2
+
G
F
P
8
1
1
14
81
9
10
8
12
82
84
82
11 14
82
11 14
Fig. 8-14 Block diagram of the SB70 interface module
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-35
Edition 04.2011
8
8.8 Interface module SB71
6DD1681-0DH1
8 binary DC signals from the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /
S7-400 FM 458- components system are adapted to the signal level of
the plant/system via the SB71 interface module.
• Housing which can be snapped-on to mounting rails
• Ribbon cable connector (X1):
− 8 pins for binary inputs
− 2 pins for 1P, 1M
• Connector (X2), 2x 8 pin
− 8 terminals for binary outputs, 24/48 V DC
− 8 terminals for the NC, contacts
• 1 terminal pair X3: 1P and 1M (power supply on the
SIMADYN D)
• 1 terminal pair X4: 2P, 2M (power supply on the
plant/system side)
• Double test socket X5: 1P(+), 1M(G)
• LED displays for diagnostic purposes
• Optocoupler to provide electrical isolation between the input and
output
The SIMADYN D power supply is connected at terminal X3:
Terminal X3 Voltage on the SIMADYN side
1P
1M
+24 V
0 V
To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply
connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0)
The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².
The SIMADYN D side power supply is displayed using a green LED (P).
The SIMADYN D side power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault
condition).
Order No.
Description
Module design
Power supply on
the SIMADYN D
side
Green LED
Red LED
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-36 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.8.1 Signals
The 24/48 V DC power supply voltage for the plant/system side signals is
connected at terminal block X4:
Terminal X4 Voltage, plant/system side
2P
2M
+24/48 V
0 V
To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply
connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0)
The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².
To connect the power supply to the terminals X3 and X4 use accessory
SM11 power supply connector for interface modules
(Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0). The maximum conductor cross section on
terminals X3 and X4 is 2,5 mm².
The SIMADYN D power supply is available at the double test socket X5
(G; +):
Double test socket X5 Voltage, SIMADYN D side
+ (1P of X3)
G (1M of X3)
+24 V
0 V
!
WARNUNG Explosion Hazard
No connections are to be made to X5 unless the area is known to be
non-hazardous.
The status of the 8 signals is displayed using a yellow LED for each of
these signals (1...8).
There are two screw connections on terminal strip X2 for each signal:
• Terminals 1 to 8 for binary outputs, 24/48 V DC
• Terminals 51 to 58 as reference point
Power supply,
plant/system side
Connectors
Test socket
Yellow LED
Terminal block for
binary signals
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-37
Edition 04.2011
8
8.8.2 Application information
The interface module has a ribbon cable connector X1 to connect the
output signals of the SIMADYN D system (refer to the Chapter Plug in
cables), as well as a terminal strip X2 to connect the plant/system
signals.
The interface module may only be mounted vertically due to the power
loss which must be dissipated.
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section
"General technical data“!
!
CAUTION No more than three binary outputs may be simultaneously short-circuited
due to the maximum permissible power loss per interface housing.
The following diagram shows a typical application:
Fig. 8-15 Application example for interface module SB71 at binary input-, output module
EB11
Other information
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-38 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.8.3 Technical data
Mounting system Housing can be snapped onto
mounting rails
Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm
Weight approx. 0.32 kg
ambient temperature for approbations max. 40° C
SIMADYN D Plant/system
side 24 V DC
Plant/system side
48 V DC
Power supply
voltage (VV)
24 V DC 24 V DC 48 V DC
Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC 18 V to 60 V DC 18 V to 60 V DC
Briefly t<500 ms 1.5 x Urated 1.5 x Vrated 1.5 x Vrated
Current drain at the
nominal value
55 mA 300 mA 360 mA
The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is th power supply for
several interface modules. The maximun current on connector X4 is 2 A,
if this is th power supply for several interface modules.
System/plant
side, 24 V DC
System/plant
side 48 V DC
No. 8 8
Output voltage for 1 signal
for 0 mA output current (VV-0.6 V) (VV-1.2 V)
for 20 mA output current (VV-2.1 V) (VV-2.0 V)
for 30 mA output current (VV-2.7 V) (VV-2.9 V)
Max. output current for 1 signal
System/plant side <20,4 V DC
20 mA -
Output voltage for 0 signal 0 V 0 V
Max. output current (for 1 signal) 30 mA 1) 30 mA
2)
1) The binary outputs are continuously short-circuit proof.
General data
ambient
temperature
Power supply
Binary outputs
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-39
Edition 04.2011
8
8.8.4 Connector assignment
To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /
S7-400 FM 458- components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further
informations see the documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /
S7-400 FM 458- components).
Terminal Designation
1 Binary output 1
2 Binary output 2
3 Binary output 3
4 Binary output 4
5 Binary output 5
6 Binary output 6
7 Binary output 7
8 Binary output 8
51 0 V, binary output 1
52 0 V, binary output 2
53 0 V, binary output 3
54 0 V, binary output 4
55 0 V, binary output 5
56 0 V, binary output 6
57 0 V, binary output 7
58 0 V, binary output 8
Table 8-9 Assignment of binary outputs of interface module SB71
The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is
0,2mm², the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².
flat connector X1
Binary outputs,
terminal strip X2
Conductor cross
section
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-40 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.8.5 Block diagram
1
X1
P
F
9
10
+
1
G
X3
1P
1M
X2
1
8
8
8
2P
2M
X4
51
58
P24/48
M24/48
Fig. 8-16 Block diagram of the SB71 interface module
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-41
Edition 04.2011
8
8.9 Interface modules SU10, SU11, SU12, SU13
SU10 6DD1681-0FG0
SU11 6DD1681-0EA1
SU12 6DD1681-0AJ1
SU13 6DD1681-0GK0
SU10 SU11 SU12 SU13
The interface module
SU10 is a
26-pin terminal block.
This is used to code
analog or binary signals
of a
26 pin ribbon cable
connector (SIMADYN D
side) on screw/plug-in
terminals (plant/system
side).
The interface module
SU11 is a
20-pin terminal block.
This is used to code
analog or binary signals
of a
20 pin ribbon cable
connector (SIMADYN D
side) on screw/plug-in
terminals (plant/system
side).
The interface module
SU12 is a
10-pin terminal block.
This is used to code
analog or binary signals
of a
10 pin ribbon cable
connector (SIMADYN D
side) on screw/plug-in
terminals (plant/system
side).
The interface module
SU12 is a
10-pin terminal block.
This is used to code
50 signals of a
50pin sub-D socket
connector (SIMADYN D
side) on screw/plug-in
terminals (plant/system
side).
SU10 26 screw/plug-in terminals (X2)
• 25 screw terminal connections for plant/system side analog or
binary signals
• 1 unassigned screw terminal connection
26 core ribbon cable X1
SU11 24 screw/plug-in terminals (X2)
• 20 screw terminal connections for plant/system side analog or
binary signals
• 4 unassigned screw terminal connections
20 core ribbon cable for connector X1
SU12 16 screw/plug-in terminals (X2)
• 10 screw terminal connections for plant/system side analog or
binary signals
• 6 unassigned screw terminal connections
10 core ribbon cable for connector X1.
ribbon cable, 10-core SIMADYN D-side analog- and binary signals
SU13 50 screw/plug-in terminals (X2)
• 50 signals are connected
• no electronic conversion
50 core screened round cable for connector X1.
Order No.
General
Module design
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-42 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.9.1 Function description
A 1:1 connection from the SIMADYN D-side ribbon cable connector X1 to
the plant/system-side screw terminal block X2 is established by using the
interface modules SU10 and SU11.
A 1:1 connection from the SIMADYN D-side connector X1 to the
plant/system-side spring-cage terminal block X2 is not established for all
signals by using the interface modules SU12 and SU13.
The following terminals have a fuse (0,5A slow-blow, internal resistance
0,25Ω) in the following signal lines:
Interface modules Terminal block X2
SU12 pin 1 – 8
SU13 pin 8, 17 – 23, 26 – 33, 36 – 43, 46 – 48
The following terminals have a protection diode ( Schottky- diode, BAT46
by Vishay) for the 24V power supply of the binary outputs in the following
signal lines:
Interface modules Terminal block X2
SU12 pin 10
SU13 pin 10
The following terminals have a ptc resistor (internal resistance 0,9Ω, e.g.
B59910-C120-A70 by Epcos) as short circuit protection for the 24V
power supply of the binary outputs in the following signal lines:
Interface modules Terminal block X2
SU12 pin 9
SU13 pin 9
The interface modules are designed so that signals can flow from both
sides. The process signals are coded without any additional electrical
isolation and signal processing.
Voltage range The maximum allowable voltages of the
modules, on which the interface modules
are connected, are to comply.
Current range max. 0.5 A
Table 8-10 Maximum permissible voltage- and current values for signal processing
Process signals
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-43
Edition 04.2011
8
8.9.2 Supplementary components
The following cables are required to connect the interface modules to the
modules:
Cable Module Plug connector
SC49 IT41 X6/X7
IT42 X8
SC50 IT42 X6
SC51 IT42 X7
Table 8-11 Modules and signal cables as supplementary components for SU10
Cable Module Plug connector
SC55 EB11 X5
SC55 EB11 X6
SC12 EA12 X6
Table 8-12 Modules and signal cables as supplementary components for SU11
Cable Module Plug connector
SC54 IT41 X6, X7
IT42 X8
SC13 EB11 X5, X6
SC7 PM5 X5
PM6 X5
SC64 FM458-1 DP X2
SC62 EXM438-1 X3
Table 8-13 Modules and signal cables as supplementary components for SU12
Leitungstyp Baugruppen Steckverbinder
SC63 EXM 438-1 X1, X2, X3
Table 8-14 Modules and signal cables as supplementary components for SU13
Cables for
SU10
SU11
SU12
SU13
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-44 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
8.9.3 Application information
The interface modules can be mounted vertically and horizontally.
They are snapped onto a mounting rail, .
Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section,
General technical data“
8.9.4 Pin/terminal assignment X1/X2
The screw terminal numbers of X2 are identical with the ribbon cable
connector numbering corresponding to the pin arrangement.
Interfacemodule Minimum conductor
cross section for the
terminal block X2
Maximum conductor
cross section for the
terminal block X2
SU10, SU11, SU12 0,2 mm² 2,5 mm².
SU13 0,2 mm² 1,5 mm².
X1
1
2
3
23
24
X2
23
24
1
2
3
25 25
NC
26
Fig. 8-17 Circuit diagram, SU10
Other information
Conductor cross
section
SU10
Program memory modules / Interface modules
Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-45
Edition 04.2011
8
X1
1
2
3
19
20
X2
19
20
1
2
3
NC
NC
NC
NC
Fig. 8-18 Circuit diagram, SU11
X1 X2
10 10
NC
NC
NC
N
C
NC
1 1
8 8
9 9
PTC
2 2
NC
Fig. 8-19 Circuit diagram, SU12
The components are described in chapter 8.9.1.
SU11
SU12
Program memory modules / Interface modules
8-46 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 04.2011
X1 X2
10 10
11 11
16 16
17 17
23 23
24 24
25 25
1 1
8 8
99
PTC
X1 X2
35 35
36 36
43 43
44 44
45 45
46 46
47 47
26 26
33 33
34 34
48 48
49 49
50 50
Fig. 8-20 Circuit diagram, SU13
The components are described in chapter 8.9.1.
8.9.5 Technical data
Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm
Weight Approx. 0.28 kg
ambient temperature for approbations
for interface modules
The maximum allowable ambient
temperatures of the modules, on which
the interface modules are connected,
are to comply.
SU13
General data
Ambient
temperature
Plug-in cables
9-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 06.2002
9.1 General information
The ribbon- and round cables are used to connect the following
components:
• CPU modules to interface modules
• input/output- and expansion modules with interface modules
• ITDC expansion module with SITOR thyristor sets
Insulation group According to VDE 0110, degree of pollution 2
Permissible operating peak
voltage
300 V, conductor with respect to ground
Permissible operating voltage 32 V, conductor to conductor
Max. current per cable 1 A
Max. resistance 220 Ohm/km
Cable width (ribbon cable) Core number x 1.27 mm
Table 9-1 General technical data
Description
General technical
data
Plug-in cables
Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-3
Edition 06.2002
9
Cable overview with connection possibilities
Module Connec
tor
Cable Partial
connector
designation
Cable conversion Interface module which can be
connected
IT41 X6 SC49 A 50 pin to 2*26 pin SU10
B SU10
SC54 A 50 pin to 5*10 pin SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71
B SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71
C SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61
D SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61
E SU12
IT41 X7 SC49 A 50 pin to 2*26 pin SU10
B SU10
SC54 A 50 pin to 5*10 pin SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71
B SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71
C SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61
D SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61
E SU12
IT42 X6 SC50 15 pin to 26 pin. SU10
IT42 X7 SC51 25 pin to 26 pin. SU10
IT42 X8 SC49 A 50 pin to 2*26 pin SU10
B SU10
SC54 A 50 pin to 5*10 pin SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71
B SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71
C SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61
D SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61
E SU12
EB11 X5 SC55 A 40 pin to 2*20 pin SU11
B SU11
SC13 A 40 pin to 4*10 pin SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71
B SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71
C SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61
D SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61
EB11 X6 SC55 A 40 pin to 2*20 pin SU11
B SU11
SC13 A 40 pin to 4*10 pin SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71
B SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71
C SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61
D SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61
EA12 X6 SC12 20 pin to 20 pin. SU11
PM5/6 X5 SC7 10 pin to 10 pin. SU12
ITDC X7 SC17.2 50 pin to 50 pin. SITOR interface
ITDC X7 SC31.2 50 pin to 50 pin. SITOR interface
PM5/6 X4 SC57 Monitor/diagnostics PC
SS4 X5 SC57 Monitor/diagnostics PC
Table 9-2 Modules and the interface modules which can be connected
Plug-in cables
9-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 06.2002
9.2 Cable types
Ribbon cable SC7 10 pin
Application Connects the 10-pin connector strip of a CPU module
with the 10-pin plug connector strip of an interface
module.
Features Unscreened ribbon cable
2 socket connectors, 10 pin
(1:1) connection, can be inserted from any direction
Cable ends Plug connectors according to DIN 41651 with strain relief
at both ends.
Length 2 m
Order No. 6DD1684-0AH0
Table 9-3 Ribbon cable SC7
Ribbon cable
SC12
20 pin, twisted pairs
Application Connects the 20 pin plug connector of an input/output
module with the 20 pin plug connector of an interface
module.
Features • unscreened ribbon cable
• twisted pairs
• two 20-pin socket connectors
• (1:1) connection
• can be inserted from any direction
Cable ends Plug connectors according to DIN 41651 with strain relief
at both ends.
Length 2 m
Order No. 6DD1684-0BC0
Table 9-4 Ribbon cable SC12
SC7
SC12
Plug-in cables
Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-5
Edition 06.2002
9
Ribbon cable
SC13
40 pin / 4 x 10 pin
Application Connects the 40-pin plug connector of an
input/output module with the 10-pin plug connectors of
four interface modules.
Features • unscreened ribbon cable
• one 40-pin socket connector
• four 10-pin socket connectors with partial connector
labeling, A to D and the assignment
A: Pins 1 to 10
B: Pins 11 to 20
C: Pins 21 to 30
D: Pins 31 to 40
of the 40-pin socket connector
Cable ends Plug connectors according to DIN 41651 with strain relief
at both ends.
Length 2 m
Order No. 6DD1684-0BD0
Table 9-5 Ribbon cable SC13
2130
C
11
B
1
10
A
3140
17,3
D
20
Connector marking
Color coding
1. core
l
t
55,6
Fig. 9-1 Ribbon cable SC13
SC13
Plug-in cables
9-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 06.2002
Ribbon cable
SC17.2
50 pin
Application Connects the SITOR interface of an expansion module
with the SITOR interface of a SITOR thyristor set or an
SE20.2 interface module.
Features • screened round cable
• twisted pairs
• 50-pin SUB-D plug connector
• 50-pin SUB-D socket connector
• (1:1) connection
Cable ends SUB-D plug connectors according to DIN 41652 are
provided at both ends
Length 2 m
Order No. 6DD1684-0BH2
Table 9-6 Ribbon cable SC17.2
Ribbon cable
SC31.2
50 pin
Application Connects the SITOR interface of an expansion module
with the SITOR interface of a SITOR thyristor set or an
SE20.2 interface module.
Features • screened round cable
• twisted pairs
• 50-pin SUB-D plug connector
• 50 pin SUB-D socket connector
• (1:1) connection
Cable ends SUB-D plug connectors according to DIN 41652 are
provided at both ends
Length 10 m
Order No. 6DD1684-0DB2
Table 9-7 Ribbon cable SC31.2
SC17.2
SC31.2
Plug-in cables
Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-7
Edition 06.2002
9
Round cable
SC49
50 pin / 2 x 26 pin
Application Connects the 50-pin SUB-D socket connector of an
expansion module with the 26-pin plug connectors of 2
interface modules.
Features • screened round cable
• 50-pin SUB-D plug connector
• two 26-pin socket connectors with partial connector
labeling A and B with the assignment
A: Pins 1 to 25
B: Pins 26 to 50
of the 50-core ribbon cable
Cable ends Expansion board: SUB-D plug connector according to DIN
41652
Interface module: Plug connector according to DIN 41651
with strain relief.
Length 2 m
Order No. 6DD1684-0EK0
Table 9-8 Ribbon cable SC49
ca. 50
Shrinking tubing
12
1)
Label glued on the cable
4
Shrinking tubing
A
B
3
A
B
2000 +/- 15
Fig. 9-2 Ribbon cable SC49
SC49
Plug-in cables
9-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 06.2002
Round cable
SC50
15 pin / 26 pin
Application Connects the 15-pin SUB-D socket connector of an
expansion module with the 26-pin plug connector of an
interface module.
Features • screened round cable
• 15-pin SUB-D plug connector
• 26-pin socket connector
• (1:1) connection, pins 16 to 26 of the socket connector
are not assigned
Cable ends Expansion module: SUB-D plug connector according to
DIN 41652
Interface module: Plug connector according to DIN 41651
with strain relief.
Length 2 m
Order No. 6DD1684-0FA0
Table 9-9 Ribbon cable SC50
2000 +/- 0,1
Shrinking tubing
4
3
2
1)
1
1
26
Fig. 9-3 Ribbon cable SC50
SC50
Plug-in cables
Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-9
Edition 06.2002
9
Round cable
SC51
25 pin / 26 pin
Application Connects the 25 pin SUB-D socket connector of an
expansion module with the 26-pin plug connector of an
interface module.
Features • screened round cable
• 25-pin SUB-D plug connector
• 26-pin socket connector
• (1:1) connection, pin 26 of the socket connector not
assigned
Cable ends Expansion module: SUB-D plug connector according to
DIN 41652
Interface module: Plug connector according to DIN 41651
with strain relief.
Length 2 m
Order No. 6DD1684-0FB0
Table 9-10 Ribbon cable SC51
2000 +/- 15
Shrinking tubing
4
3
2
1)
1
Fig. 9-4 Ribbon cable SC51
SC51
Plug-in cables
9-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 06.2002
Round cable
SC54
50 pin / 5 x 10 pin
Application Connects the 50-pin SUB-D socket connector of an expansion
module with the 10-pin plug connectors of 5 interface modules.
Features • screened round cable
• 50-pin SUB-D plug connector
• 5, 10-pin socket connectors with printed partial connector
designations A to E with the assignment
A: Pins 1 to 10
B: Pins 11 to 20
C: Pins 21 to 30
D: Pins 31 to 40
E: Pins 41 to 50
of the 50-pin plug connector
Cable ends Expansion module: SUB-D plug connector according to DIN
41652
Interface module: Plug connector according to DIN 41651 with
strain relief.
Length 2 m
Order No. 6DD1684-0FE0
Table 9-11 Ribbon cable SC54
ca. 50
Shrinking tubing
12
1)
2000 +/- 15
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
E
D
C
B
A
Shrinking tubing
Shrinking tubing
Fig. 9-5 Ribbon cable SC54
SC54
Plug-in cables
Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-11
Edition 06.2002
9
Sub-D connector Plug connector Sub-D connector Socket connector
Partial connect. A Partial connector D
1 1 11 1
34 2 44 2
18 3 28 3
2 4 12 4
35 5 45 5
19 6 29 6
3 7 13 7
36 8 46 8
20 9 30 9
4 10 14 10
Partial connect. B Partial connector E
37 1 47 1
21 2 31 2
5 3 15 3
38 4 48 4
22 5 32 5
6 6 16 6
39 7 49 7
23 8 33 8
7 9 17 9
40 10 50 10
Partial connect. C
24 1
8 2
41 3
25 4
9 5
42 6
26 7
10 8
43 9
27 10
Table 9-12 Ribbon cable SC54
Plug-in cables
9-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 06.2002
Ribbon cable
SC55
40 pin / 2 x 20 pin
Application Connects the 40-pin plug connector of an input/output
module with the 20-pin plug connectors of two interface
modules.
Features • unscreened ribbon cable
• 1, 40-pin socket connector
• 2, 20-pin socket connectors with partial connector
designations A and B with the assignment
A: Pins 1 to 20
B: Pins 21 to 40
of the 40-pin socket connector
Cable ends Connectors according to DIN 41651 with tension relief at
both ends.
Length 2 m
Order No. 6DD1684-0FF0
Table 9-13 Ribbon cable SC55
A
B
12)
1)
2
3
stamped on acc. to DIN 30640 A6 -sw
2000 +/- 15
Fig. 9-6 Ribbon cable SC55
SC55
Plug-in cables
Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-13
Edition 06.2002
9
Round cable
SC57
9 pin / 9 pin with 9-pin to 26-pin adapter
Application Connects a PC (COM 1 / 2, RS 232) with
the serial interface of a CPU module with cable 1, 10m
or a SS4 communications module (on CS7) with cable 1
and 2 (adapter), 10m + 0.5m
Features • screened round cable
• twisted pairs
• 26-pin SUB-D plug connector
• 9-pin SUB-D socket connector
Cable ends SUB-D plug connectors according to DIN 41652 are
located at both ends
Length 10 m, with adapter 0.5 m
Order No. 6DD1684-0FH0
Table 9-14 Ribbon cable SC57
500
7
35
3
35
2
3
Tinned
Tinned
Cable ends
aligned
Item Halve the rubber gasket (S.-N.:087650)
and insert both parts above one
another over the cable
Leave 9mm screen
and fold back over the
sheath. Remove the
transparent foil
Contact assignment
X3 X4
Item Shrink tubing (fold the
screen back over the sheath)
PM
PM
Part 2
SS4
SS4
15
9
6
4
3
2
87
19
10 18
19
1) 1)
6
7
8
1
91
26
26
1) Mounting position taken into account
2) Label glued on
3) Screw-in the screws provided into the housing
3)
2
1
2) Label 2
4
5
1
3)
9-pin socket 26-pin plug
connector.
Fig. 9-7 Ribbon cable SC57
SC57
SC57
adapter for
CS7/SS4
Plug-in cables
9-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 06.2002
Part 1
Part 2
3
2
5
-X2
5
3
2
-X1
RUNDKABEL, GESCHIRMT
round cable, screened
SUB-D, 9-POHLIG
STECKERBESCHRIFTUNG:
PC (Com 1)
SUB-D, 9-pin
connector marking
PC (Com 1)
SUB-D, 9-POLIG
STECKERBESCHRIFTUNG:
PM
SUB-D, 9-pin
connector marking
PM
4
16
9
-X4
5
2
3
-X3
RUNDKABEL, GESCHIRMT
round cable, screened
SUB-D, 9-POLIG
STECKERBESCHRIFTUNG:
PM
SUB-D, 9-pin
connector marking
PM
SUB-D, 26-POLIG
STECKERBESCHRIFTUNG:
SS4
SUB-D, 26-pin
connector marking
SS4
Fig. 9-8 Ribbon cable SC57
SC57
cables 1 and 2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-1
Edition 03.2001
10
10 Operator control panel OP2
10.1 Function overview 10-2
10.2 Process data handling 10-3
10.3 Binary value processing 10-5
10.4 System operation 10-10
10.5 System run-up 10-18
10.6 Handling OP2 errors 10-20
10.7 Front panel 10-24
10.8 Unit dimensions and mechanical mounting 10-25
10.9 Battery change 10-26
10.10 Connecting elements 10-26
10.11 Power supply 10-27
10.12 Baud rates 10-27
10.13 Cables and connectors 10-27
10.14 Using a printer with OP2 10-29
10.15 Labeling and replacing the labeling strips 10-30
Overview
Operator control panel OP2
10-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
10.1 Function overview
The OP 2 is an operator control device for the SIMADYN D system. It offers
the following functionality:
MSG
Process data handling
Displays and processes up to 24 process data. 2 process
data are always displayed.
BIN
Binary value processing
Displays and processes up to 32 binary values
MSG
Message system
Autonomous message system for P32 messages from
SIMADYN D. Messages are saved, sorted according to the
time they were received, and can be deleted. Only one
message is displayed at any one time (max. 80 characters).
MSG
SYS
System message
Messages which come directly from OP2
SYSTEM
System operation
Changing and saving the basic function
SIEMENS
Numerical pad
Two-line display
40 characters per line
MSG BIN SYSTEM
VAL MSG
SYS
B1
B2
B3
B4
V1
V4
V7
V10
V2
V5
V8
V11
V3
V6
V9
V12
1
4
7
0
2
5
8
,
3
6
9
+/-
Enter
SEL SHIFT DIM CHG EPROM
Process data panels V1...V12
Binar
y
value ke
y
s B1..B4
PRN
DEL
ACT
OLD
SIMADYN OP 2
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-3
Edition 03.2001
10
10.2 Process data handling
Process data handling is selected using the VAL key. The LED in the key is
lit if process data handling has been selected (the VAL key).
10.2.1 General information
Two of a total of 24 process data can be simultaneously displayed (upper
and lower display line). The 24 values are sub-divided into two panels
(V1..V12 + SHIFT) for easier selection.
The sub-division of the two panels according to setpoints and actual values
can be configured as required (for instance, 20 actual values can be
configured or just 3). The sub-division according to setpoints and actual
values is exclusively configured in SIMADYN D.
The selected process data values are always displayed normalized, in
accordance with the pre-setting (default) together with dimension and name.
If a name has not been configured, then the „VALUE xy“ (xy = 1 ..24)
designator is displayed as default value.
If a non-configured process data is selected, then operating message No. 14
(„NO MEASURED VALUE INITIALIZED“) is displayed. This text is displayed
for 3 seconds, and then the previous value is re-displayed.
ACCESS
VALUE 24
=
=
-0.123456789012345 Rev/min
-17.365195745 E-55 POUNDS
Designator Value Dimensions
% data
10.2.2 Behavior at run-up
The OP2 automatically goes into the process data handling mode after it has
been initialized. The last selected values are displayed again. At first run-up,
the first two configured values are displayed (normally V1 and V2). If only
one process data has been configured, then operating message No. 14 is
displayed in the lower display line („NO MEASURED VALUE INITIALIZED“).
If no process data have been configured at the SIMADYN D side, the OP2
goes into the basic message system processing function. If process data
handling is selected at a later time, then operating message No. 14 is
displayed in the upper line („NO MEASURED VALUE INITIALIZED“). The
text is displayed until another basic function is selected.
VAL key
Process data
Operator control panel OP2
10-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
10.2.3 Operator control overview for process data handling
VAL: Displays process data
- The two last selected process data are displayed (Default: VALUE V1 and V2)
SEL: Selects process data
- The select functions V1...V12/SHFT/DIM are activated
- The designator in the active display line flashes
- The active display line changes if the key is again depressed
CHG: Changes setpoints
- The change mode for the selected process data is enabled
- A change currently being made is cancelled
- Operating message No. 5 "SETPOINT CHANGE INHIBITED", if an ACTUAL VALUE was selected
(configured)
E2 PROM: Saving changes in the SIMADYN D EPROM
- Activate the memory function
- The LED flashes until the function has been completed with Enter
- Operating message No. 35 "SAVE EPROM UNSUCCESSFUL". A value
is not accepted if there is an error condition
SHIFT DIM
VAL
Enter
SEL
CHG
EPROM
Value transfer
V1 V2
...
Selects process data
V1...V12: Measured value 1...24
SHIFT: Toggles
between the process
data panels
LED dark: V1...V12
LED lit: V13...V24
DIM: Toggling the
representation type
between values with
dimension and value as
a percentage
Decrease
value
Increase
value
Changing a value using the continuous
change keys and TIP operation
Entering a new value
Enter
Numerical
keypad Entering a new value
Toggling between
mantisse and exponent
for floating-point numbe
r
Cursor position
Terminate and transfer
the change
Correction
backspace key
Cursor position
MSG BIN
SYSTEM MSG
SYS VAL
Running functions are CANCELED
Return to
display operation
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-5
Edition 03.2001
10
10.3 Binary value processing
SIEMENS
Two-line display
40 characters per line
MSG BIN SYSTE
M
VAL MSG
SYS
B1
B2
B3
B4
V1
V4
V7
V10
V2
V5
V8
V11
V3
V6
V9
V12
1
4
7
0
2
5
8
,
3
6
9
+/-
Enter
SEL SHIFT DIM CHG EPROM
PRN
DEL
ACT
OLD
SIMADYN OP 2
Processing binary KEYS B1...B4
(bin. values 1...4)
Processing the binary value menus
(bin. values 5.32)
Up to 32 binary values can be processed. (BIN and B1..B4). The binary
values cannot be saved in the SIMADYN D EPROM. If this is required, then
the binary values should be configured as process data in SIMADYN D.
Binary values are processed using two mechanisms:
Keys B1 - B4 can always be selected, unless system processing has been
selected (SYSTEM).
The LED in the four binary keys indicates whether the appropriate binary
value is „0“ (LED is dark) or „1“ (LED is lit). The status is inverted when
depressed.
Each time the KEY is depressed, the LED flashes until SIMADYN D
acknowledges the change.
If the binary values were not configured on the SIMADYN D side, then the
LEDs in keys B1 to B4 remain dark (i. e. the keys have no effect).
Overview
Binary keys
B1 - B4
Operator control panel OP2
10-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
BIN
Starts the binary value menu / binary values B5 to B32 are
processed.
SIGNAL9 SIGNAL10 SIGNAL11 SIGNAL12
Name (can be configured in SIMADYN D)
default name: SIGNAL No.
Status display:
- as display 0/1
- as text alternative (configurable text)
- ----if not configured
0 FULL OFF - - - -
Enter Change
0/1 changeover
Select the next
or previous
binary value
The status display flashes after each action until SIMADYN D acknowledges
the change.
MSG BIN
SYSTEM MSG
SYS VAL
Running functions are cancelled
No function
10.3.1 Message system processing
The OP2 combines all of the incoming messages into its own message
system which can administer up to 30 messages (save). If more messages
are received, then the first messages are overwritten (ring buffer
mechanism) and an overflow message is entered into the buffer.
Operating message No. 15 („NUMBER OF LOST MESSAGES: xx“), xx
specifies the number of messages which have been overwritten.
Only one message can be displayed at any one time. OP2 sorts all of the
received messages into chronological order.
An OP2 does not have to administer all messages, transmitted from
SIMADYN D. Message classes are allocated, which are specified when
parameterizing the OP2, which are then used as selection criterion as to
which messages should be administered by OP2. All messages can be
permitted, or 1, 2 or 3 message class areas.
The message classes are defined in SIMADYN D when configuring the
message system (refer to the system software and configuring D7-SYS;
message class = prefix).
The message system processing is selected via the MSG key. After being
selected, the key LED is lit (bright). If OP2 hasn’t received any messages,
then after selection, operating message No. 16 is displayed („NO
MESSAGES AVAILABLE“). The text remains until either a message is
received, or another function is selected (e. g. VAL key).
If the OP2 has received new messages from SIMADYN D (since the last
time that message system processing was selected), then the MSG-key
LED flashes if the message system processing is not selected.
When the message system processing is re-selected, the last selected
message is displayed again. When the key is repeatedly depressed, the
latest message is displayed. You can scroll through the selected OP2
message system using the raise/lower keys.
Binary value
processing
Evaluating the
message class
areas
Operator control
overview for
message
processing
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-7
Edition 03.2001
10
The sequence for depressing the various keys for all functions in the
message processing are now listed. OP2 rejects illegal key combinations
with an appropriate message.
MSGBIN
SYSTEM MSG
SYS VAL
Running functions are cancelled
Jump to the latest message
10.3.2 Message on the display
OP2 displays messages in two different message formats. The two message
formats are:
• ASCII-text messages: They consist of:
Date/time, message type, message text and process data/dimensions
• Prefix/suffix messages: They consist of:
Date/time, message type, prefix, suffix and process data/dimension
Date/time consist of day, month, year, hour, minute, seconds and
milliseconds.
Message types: Warning, fault, communications error and system error.
The syntax/representation types of the message system must be used.
Process data/dimensions are optional information in a message and are
exclusively dependent on the software configured in SIMADYN D.
The configuring engineer decides, on the SIMADYN D side, which format is
displayed, when configuring the message system.
Further information
is provided in the User Documentation for the SIMADYN D system software
and configuring D7-SYS.
The OP2 displays the messages configured in SIMADYN D as follows:
MSG: Selecting the message system processing
- the message operation is re-selected (displays the last selected message)
- jumps to the latest message
VAL
Selects the next most recent
or next oldest message
ACT + DEL: Deletes
the currently
displayed message
DELETE PRINT
DEL
ACT +DEL
OLD +PRN
ACT +
PRN
OLD +
OLD + DEL: Deletes
all old messages
including the
currently displayed
message
ACT + DEL: Prints
the currently
displayed message
OLD + DEL: Prints
all old messages
including the
currently displayed
message
Messages on the
display
Operator control panel OP2
10-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
Possible message formats
Prefix/suffix Text Evaluation and display on the OP2
no no Message is not administered.
yes no The prefix is evaluated as message class. If the
message class is permissible, the message is
administered (stored) in the prefix/suffix format.
no yes Messages without prefix/suffix, with text, are always
administered in the OP2.
yes yes Prefix is evaluated as message class. If it is valid, the
message is administered (stored) in the text format.
If process data (with dimensions) is included in a message, then the OP2
„cuts“ the message text after 28 characters if it is longer (independent as to
whether a dimension is available or not). The message text may be up to 56
characters long if there is no process data.
If the message text is shorter than the maximum length, then the remaining
characters are filled with „blanks“; i. e. the display stays „dark“ at these
positions. Thus, the following message format is provided at the display
(2x40 characters) (d=day, m=month or minutes, y=year, h=hours,
z=milliseconds, T=message type (warning, fault etc.):
1) Message with process data (and dimension): Max. 28 message
characters
dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss.zzz T A MAX. OF
28 CHARACTERS ARE HERE!!-999.12345678 E+99
DIMENSION
2) Message without process data: Max. 56 message characters
dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss.zzz T A MAX. OF
56 CHARACTERS COME FROM SIMADYN D!!!!
Example for a message in the ASCII text format with measured value
(without dimension):
01.10.94 00:00:05:167 W THE MOTOR RUNS
WITH UE CURRENT -99999.1234567 E+99
For the „prefix/suffix“ format, the following message formats can be
displayed on the OP2 display (d=day, m=month or minute, y=year, h=hour,
z=milliseconds, T=message type (warning, fault etc.):
1) Message with process data (and dimension):
dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss.zzz T P:54321 S:54321
-999.12345678 E+99 DIMENSION
2) Message without process data:
dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss.zzz T P54321 S:54321
10.3.3 Message print-out
The OP2 defines the message format at the printer, so that 2 display lines (i.
e. a complete message) are combined to form a printer line. OP2
automatically inserts a line break after each message. A message is
therefore always 80 characters long; the character length at the printer
should be appropriately set. OP2 does not change the message structure.
ASCII text message
Prefix/suffix
message
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-9
Edition 03.2001
10
The user can print-out all of the acquired messages using the PRINT/OLD or
PRINT/ACT keys (the two keys should be simultaneously depressed).
For OLD/PRINT, all of the messages including the presently displayed
message, are printed. For ACT/PRINT, that message is printed, which is
being currently displayed.
The messages are not automatically deleted after having been printed.
Messages are printed using the DEL key.
When parameterizing OP2, it should be specified as to whether messages
should be printed immediately after they have been received in the OP2
(refer to "Parameterizing for the message system processing")
If YES is entered, then the messages are printed-out immediately after the
message telegram has been received. With this type of print-out, there is no
guarantee that the messages are printed-out in the correct chronological
sequence.
Characters 1-40 Characters 41-80
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
11.10.94 20:13:44:571 W MO TO R No . 4 HAS SPEED: -999.121234567E+01 RPM
Print control
Deleting messages
Automatic printing
Operator control panel OP2
10-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
10.4 System operation
In system operation, the basic settings (operating parameters) for the OP2
are defined. The settings are permanently saved in the OP2 flash memory.
SYSTEM
Depress the SYSTEM key for longer than 3 sec.
10.4.1 Function overview
The following menu appears in system operation:
MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE
PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS
Enter Start the functionCURSOR
Select the function
Operator control
Function Definition
MESSAGE Parameterization for message system processing
VALUE Parameterization for process data processing
USS-INTERFACE Parameterizing the USS interface to SIMADYN D
PRINTER Parameterizing the printer interface
DISPLAY-OPTIONS Selecting the language for all OP2 messages
Selection
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-11
Edition 03.2001
10
10.4.2 Parameterizing the message system processing
MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE
PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS
CURSOR
Function selection
Message
Message Class
Print Message
Description:
The message class areas, which can be configured as prefix, are specified,
which are accepted from OP2
- Input 0 in area 1 deletes all entries. All messages are accepted from the BUS
- Selecting a displayed message is realized as for example, area 2
MESSAGE CLASS MESSAGE
1-100 150-150 12000-15000 0000
Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Default "ALL"
CURSOR
Value selection
Nuermical
keypad
Enter Transfer
Value input
Display: (example)
Description:
If the parameter is set to YES, all of the thre received messages are
immediately output via the printer interface
PRINT MESSAGE DIRECTLY MESSAGE
YES NO YES
CURSOR
Value selection
Enter Transfer
Display:
Enter
Operator control panel OP2
10-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
10.4.3 Parameterizing for process data
MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE
PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS
CURSOR
Selects the function
VALUE
Host Response Time
Change Frequency
Description:
SIMADYN D response time when acknowledging process data changes
(HOST RESPONSE TIME)
HOST RESPONSE TIME (SEC) VALUE
10 1...10
Numerical
keypad
Enter Transfer
Value input
Display:
Enter
Change Delay
Description:
Repeat cycle (ms) for setting the value using the raise/lower keys.
CHANGE FREQUENCY (MS) VALUE
200 100...500
Numerical
keypad
Enter Transfer
Value input
Display:
Description:
Delay time (ms) between depressing the key until the action is repeated.
CHANGE DELAY (MS) VALUE
800 100...800
Numerical
keypad
Enter Transfer
Value input
Display:
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-13
Edition 03.2001
10
10.4.4 Parameterizing for the USS interface
MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE
PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS
CURSOR
Function selection
Station-Address
Baudrate
Description: Node number (station address)
The node number (station address) on the USS bus is defined using this
parameter. If a node number (station address) is not entered, then the
device does not establish a connection to SIMADYN D.
STATION-ADDRESS USS-INTERFACE
7 0..31
Numerical
keypad
Enter Transfer
Value input
Display:
Enter
Delay Time
Description:
Baud rate of the USS bus
BAUDRATE (KBAUD) USS-INTERFACE
9,6 9, 6 19, 2 93, 75 187, 5
Enter Transfer
Display:
Description:
Cycle time monitoring of the USS MASTER
DELAY-TIME (ms) USS-INTERFACE
100 0...100
Numerical
keypad
Enter Transfer
Value input
Display:
USS-Interface
Area 1
CURSOR
Function selection
Operator control panel OP2
10-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
10.4.5 Parameterization for the printer
MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE
PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS
CURSOR
Function selection
PRINTER
Baud rate Description: Baud rate for the printer interface:
BAUDRATE (KBAUD) PRINTER
9, 6 2, 4 4, 8 9, 6
Enter Transfer
Display:
Enter
CURSOR
Function selection
Data bits Description: Character format, data bits (DATA BITS):
DATABITS PRINTER
8 7 8
Enter Transfer
Display:
CURSOR
Function selection
Parity Description: Character format, parity (PARITY):
PARITY PRINTER
EVEN EVEN ODD
Enter Transfer
Display:
CURSOR
Function selection
Stop bits Description: Character format, stop bits (STOP BITS)
STOP BITS PRINTER
2 1 2
Enter Transfer
Display:
CURSOR
Function selection
LINE TYPE Description: Toggling the printer INTERFACE between a TTY-
and V24 connection
LINE TYPE PRINTER
TTY V24 TTY
Enter Transfer
Display:
CURSOR
Function selection
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-15
Edition 03.2001
10
10.4.6 End of system operation
SYSTEM operation is terminated by selecting END and depressing the
ENTER key.
MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE
PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS
CURSOR
Function selection
END
END Description:
If the BUS has to be re-initialized to SIMADYN D,
"YES" should be entered, otherwise, "NO".
INIT REQUEST
YES YES NO
Enter Transfer
Display:
Enter
CURSOR
Function selection
10.4.7 Parameterizing the display options
MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE
PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS
CURSOR
Function selection
PRINTER
Languages Description:
Selects the OP2 system message languages (the menu language in
"SYSTEM operation" is always English).
D = German, I = Italian, F =French, E = Spanish
LANGUAGE DISPLAY-OPTIONS
D ENGLISH D I F E
Enter Transfer
Display (Example):
Enter
CONTRAST Description: CONTRAST display setting
CONTRAST DISPLAY-OPTIONS
1 0...15
Enter Transfer
Display:
Numerical
keypad
Value in
p
ut
CURSOR
Function selection
10.4.8 Self-test
The user can test all of the OP2 sub-components using the self-test. The
self-test function can only be accessed from system operation.
Operator control panel OP2
10-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
System operation is selected by depressing the SYSTEM key (longer than 3
seconds). The self-test is started by simultaneously depressing the
keys. The particular function is selected using the cursor keys and
acknowledged with ENTER.
The test menu is displayed:
DISPLAY USS-INTERFACE KEYBOARD
PRINTER-INTERFACE END HARDWARE
Various test patterns are continuously written into the display. Display errors
can be identified by visually checking these optical patterns on the screen.
The test is terminated with ENTER.
Cyclic data are transmitted via the USS bus, and they are simultaneously
received and checked. The USS interface can be checked using a short-
circuit plug connector. During the test, the following message is shown on
the upper display line: „USS-INTERFACE TEST -> ENTER FOR END“. After
the test has been terminated, the following message is indicated on the
lower display line: „USS-INTERFACE OK“ or „USS-INTERFACE ERROR“
(the test is terminated with ENTER). The short-circuit plug-connector
assignment is:
PIN RS 485 Selbsttest
1
2
3 Data P TxD+
4 RxD+
5 GND GsND
6 +5V +5V
7
8 TxD-
9 Data N RxD-
51
96
A test telegram is output at the printer via the printer port. The printer port
can be checked using a short-circuit plug connector. The test is terminated
with ENTER.
Assignment of the short-circuit plug connector:
Port assignment SS 1 and SS 2 A
PIN General V.24 TTY
1 Screen
2 RxD-
3 RxD
4 TxD
5 CTS
6 TxD+
7 TxD-
8 Screen
9 RxD+
10 RTS
11 +20mA
12 GND GND
13 +20mA
14 +5V
15 GND
81
15 9
The test is terminated with ENTER.
Starting the self-
test
DISPLAY TEST
USS INTERFACE
TEST
PRINTER
INTERFACE TEST
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-17
Edition 03.2001
10
The OP2 tests the internal memory. The OP2 shows the operating status in
the upper display line „RAM-EPROM-FLASH-TEST“.
The actual test step is displayed in the lower line. When errors occur, OP2
stays at that particular test step and issues the message „TEST ERROR“. If
no errors are detected, OP2 returns to the self-test menu after the test has
been completed. The test takes approximately two minutes.
Message texts during testing:
WRITE READ TEST OF RAM
CALCULATE CHECK SUM OF EPROM
WRITE READ TEST OF FLASH
End of the self test and the OP2 returns to the SYSTEM mode.
Hardware
END
Operator control panel OP2
10-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
10.5 System run-up
OP2 is powered-up by switching-on the +24V power supply voltage. All of
the connections must be correct to ensure perfect functioning of the unit:
• USS connecting cable to SIMADYN D
• printer cable (if a printer is connected).
• power supply cable
After being powered-up, the „OP2 Version V1.0“ message is displayed for
approximately 5 seconds (the actual firmware version is displayed).
OP2 then goes into an automatic hardware test routine. The following
messages occur one after the another during this test routine:
EPROM ok Error EPROM -memory failure (OP2 defect/replace)
RAM ok Error RAM-memory failure (OP2 defect/replace)
FLASH-TEST Error FLASH-memory failure (OP2 defect/replace)
Error FLASH-memory erased
Error FLASH-memory chsum wrong
- incorrect contents/checksum of the FLASH memory
- FLASH is re-initialized
- run-up with DEFAULT initialization
TEST ok
FLASH-TEST
- - -
The OP2 then automatically establishes a communications link to SIMADYN
D.
10.5.1 Establishing a communications link to SIMADYN D
After a successful self-test, OP2 establishes a communications link to the
SIMADYN D subracks.
This procedure can either be initiated by SIMADYN D or by the OP2. This is
realized as follows
• SIMADYN D: After resetting or powering-up the subrack power supply.
• OP2: After powering-up the OP2 power supply voltage or, optionally,
when exiting the SYSTEM mode (for menu item „INIT REQUEST“ in the
main menu „END“).
When OP2 starts to establish the link, the following message is displayed
„INITIALIZATION REQUESTED“ (upper display line). After the first data
have been exchanged with SIMADYN D, the process values are
automatically initialized (message in the lower display line: „PROCESS
DATA INITIALIZATION“) and then the binary value initialization (message in
the lower display line: „BINARY VALUE INITIALIZATION“).
Power-on
Hardware test
Establishing the
communications
link
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-19
Edition 03.2001
10
If all of the initialization data have been completely loaded into the OP2, OP2
automatically goes into the process data display mode (refer to the Chapter
"Process data processing").
OP2 remains in the particular initialization step until it has been completed.
Depending on the particular configured software, it can take up to a minute
to establish the communications link. This link can only be established after
the SIMADYN D subrack has run-up.
If an attempt is made to select operating modes, process data- or binary
value display while the link is being established, OP2 ignores this attempt.
However, received message telegrams are processed.
If errors occur when establishing a communications link, an appropriate
system message is generated and the LED in the key SYSMSG starts to
flash. The message can then be read-out by depressing the SYSMSG key.
OP2 waits until the error has been rectified.
The following errors can occur:
• No activity on the USS bus (S24 system message). This message is
set once when OP2 runs-up, and disappears as soon as the first
telegram is transferred along the bus.
− SIMADYN D subracks are not powered-up or are running-up.
− BUS coupling is not available or faulted, cable not inserted.
− baud rate incorrectly set.
• No SCAN telegram with node number (station number) of the OP2
after the protocol monitoring time has expired (system message
S25).
− the incorrect BUS address is set in OP2
− SIMADYN D configuring incorrect.
• Transfer error (system message S4). The message only appears until
the correct telegram has been received.
− line fault, incorrect baud rate.
• Erroneous INIT data The received data are logically erroneous.
− cable fault, incorrect baud rate.
− check the configured software.
The errors must be rectified. The OP2 can then be re-initialized, initiated via
the system mode.
Errors when
establishing the
link
Operator control panel OP2
10-20 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
10.6 Handling OP2 errors
OP2 has two types of error messages:
• System messages: The messages can be analyzed using the SYSMSG
key. (refer to Chapter "OP2 error handling).
• Operating messages: The messages are displayed for approx. 3
seconds and then automatically disappear. (refer to Chapter "Operating
messages").
10.6.1 System messages
If OP2 identifies an error during parameterization, initialization or in cyclic
operation, an appropriate error message is entered into the system error
field and the LED in the SYSMSG key starts to flash.
MSG BIN
SYSTEM MSG
SYS
VAL
Running functions are canceled
No function
Onl
y
p
ossible after the INIT
p
hase
MSG
SYS Function selection
Scroll through all active messages
If there is no active message: The following message is displayed
No. 19 (NO SYSTEM ERROR)
The message can be displayed using the SYSMSG key. All of the error
messages and associated error causes and corrective actions are now
subsequently described. The errors cannot be acknowledged.
The cause must be removed, otherwise error-free operation is not
possible.
These are the system messages:
No Text Description /cause/ corrective
action
Reference
(Chapter)
10 INITIALIZATION
ERROR MEASURED
VALUE NO.
INIT telegram error for a process
data. Repeat initialization. Check
configuring.
2.2.1
18 NO PRINTER BUFFER
FREE
The printer cannot print-out a
message fast enough. Messages
are lost. Check the printer and
printer connection.
1.4.6
19 NO SYSTEM ERROR System mode: There are no active
error messages
3
23 DATA TRANSFER
ERROR, CHECK
HARDWARE,
Data transfer errors occur on the
USS bus:
- faults on the cable
- incorrect baud rate
- BUS conflict on the USS bus
2.2
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-21
Edition 03.2001
10
No Text Description /cause/ corrective
action
Reference
(Chapter)
- defective BUS cable
24 SYSTEM ERROR Device not able to function. Critical
faults/errors in the electronics.
General
information
25 INIT. ERROR, NO
MEASURED VALUE
INIT. DATA
Process data haven’t been
completely initialized. OP2 expects
additional process initialization
data. OP2 is not ready. Check the
BUS structure and configuring.
2.3
26 INIT. ERROR, NO
BINARY VALUE INIT.
DATA
Process data haven’t been
completely initialized. OP2 expects
additional process initialization
data. OP2 is not ready. Check the
BUS structure and configuring.
2.3
27 INIT. ERROR,
MEASURED VALUE
INIT. DATA
The initialization data for the
process data are erroneous. The
OP2 is not ready. Check the BUS
structure and configuring
2.3
28 INIT.ERROR, BINARY
VALUE - INIT. DATA
The initialization data for the
process data are erroneous. The
OP2 is not ready. Check the BUS
structure and configuring.
2.3
29 MEASURED VALUE
CHANGE ERROR
Error when changing the process
data. Changing process data in the
VAL/CHANGE mode was
unsuccessful. Repeat the function,
if required check configuring.
1.2.3
30 INITIALIZATION ERROR,
DELAY
Initialization time monitoring
(watchdog) exceeded. OP2 not
ready. Check the BUS structure
and configuring.
2.3.2
31 INTERRUPTION TO THE
HOST CONNECTION
No USS telegrams are received.
Check the BUS connection/cable.
2.2
32 NO BUS CONNECTION,
INCORRECT STATION
ADDRESS
No telegrams with their own
particular station address received.
Configuring error or BUS address
incorrectly set.
2.2 + 1.5.4
33 PRINTER NOT READY
OR NOT CONNECTED
OP 2 does not print. The printer
does not respond. Check the
printer and printer cable.
1.4.6
35 EPROM SAVE
UNSUCCESSFUL
Saving the VAL/CHG/ mode in the
EPROM unsuccessful, check
configuring.
1.2.3
36 TELEGRAM ERROR, NO
BUS CIRCULATION
Check the BUS structure, check
the configuring, master is not
transmitting SCAN telegram with
the OP node number.
2.2
10.6.2 Operating messages
Information texts, alarms (warnings) and fault/error messages are displayed
as operating messages for approximately three seconds, in order to support
the operator resolve problems.
Operator control panel OP2
10-22 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
No Text Description /cause/ corrective
action
Reference
(Chapter)
1 MEASURED VALUE NOT
INITIALIZED
A process data number V1..V24
was selected which was not
configured in SIMADYN D
1.2
2 FUNCTION NOT
PERMISSIBLE
This function is not permissible in
this mode.
General
information
3 UPPER LIMIT
EXCEEDED
The configured upper limits were
exceeded when a setpoint was
entered or changed.
1.2
4 LOWER LIMIT FALLEN
BELOW
The configured lower limit was
fallen below when entering a
setpoint or changing it
1.2
5 SETPOINT CHANGE
INHIBITED
When selecting the change mode
for a process data, SIMADYN D
did not enable the change.
Presently occupied/changed by
another OP or, was configured as
ACT value.
1.2
6 LAST CHANGE STILL
NOT ACCEPTED
SIMADYN D did not accept the last
process data change. Repeat the
function or check the configuring.
1.2
7 DELAY TIME EXPIRED SIMADYN D has still not accepted
the actual process data change.
The monitoring time (watchdog)
exceeded. Repeat the function or
check the configuring.
1.2
8 FUNCTION NOT
POSSIBLE
A key was depressed which is not
possible in the current mode.
General info
9 INCORRECT INPUT An invalid value has been entered General info
11 INITIALIZATION
RUNNING
OP2 waits for general INIT DATA.
OP2 not ready, if required, check
BUS structure and configuring.
2.2.1
12 MEASURED VALUE
INITIALIZATION
OP2 waits for process data
initialization. OP2 not ready, if
required check BUS structure or
configuring.
2.2.1
13 BINARY VALUE
INITIALIZATION
OP2 waits for BINARY VALUE
initialization. OP2 not ready, if
required, check BUS structure or
configuring.
2.2.1
14 NO MEASURED VALUE
INITIALIZED
No process data were initialized
and configured, VAL function is not
possible
1.2
15 NUMBER OF LOST
MESSGES:
Message processing overflow
message. This message is entered
into the message buffer as the
latest message. The most recent
messages overwrite the oldest
messages. The number of lost
messages is incremented until
messages are deleted using DEL.
1.4
17 NO FURTHER
MESSAGES PRESENT
The end of the messages has been
reached when scrolling through the
message buffer.
1.4
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-23
Edition 03.2001
10
No Text Description /cause/ corrective
action
Reference
(Chapter)
20 RAM-TEST
UNSUCCESSFUL,
REPLACE THE UNIT
OP2 has an electronics defect and
is not functioning: Self-test
message
2.1.2
21 FLASH TEST
UNSUCCESSFUL,
REPLACE THE UNIT
OP2 has an electronics defect and
is not functioning: Self-test
message
2.1.2
22 EPROM-INCORRECT
EPROM CHECKSUM,
REPLACE THE UNIT
OP2 has an electronics defect and
is not functioning: Self-test
message
2.1.2
34 INITIALIZATION
REQUESTED
OP2 waits for initialization data 2.3
35 EPROM SAVE
UNSUCCESSFUL
VAL/CHG/ save mode
unsuccessful in the EPROM
Check configuring.
1.2.3
37 PRINTER INTERFACE
OK
Self-test message
38 DEFECTIVEW PRINTER
INTERFACE
Self-test message
39 CALCULATING EPROM
CHECKSUM
Self-test message
40 RAM READ/WRITE TEST Self-test message
41 FLASHRAM
READ/WRITE TEST
Self-test message
42 TEST OK Self-test message
Operator control panel OP2
10-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
10.7 Front panel
OP2 has a two-section aluminum housing, consisting of an extruded housing
frame and a rear cover panel. At the front, the unit has degree of protection
IP65, and at the rear, IP20. OP 2 has ventilation slots at the top and bottom.
The housing frame includes:
• slots to accept labeling strips (for example to label the function keys)
• the front panel with membrane keypad and LEDs
SIEMENS
Two-line display
each line 40 characters
MSG BIN MSG SYSTEM
VAL SYS
B1
B2
B3
B4
V1
V4
V7
V10
V2
V5
V8
V11
V3
V6
V9
V12
1
4
7
0
2
5
8
,
3
6
9
+/-
Enter
SEL SHIFT DIM CHG E2
EPROM
Membrane keypad
PRN
DEL
ACT
OLD
SIMADYN OP 2
Housing frame
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-25
Edition 03.2001
10
10.8 Unit dimensions and mechanical mounting
OP2 can be mounted in cabinets or control desks:
• mounting cut-out: 230 x 158 mm
• mounting depth: 40 mm
• max. front panel thickness: 16 mm
NOTE The following points must be observed when mounting the OP:
• sufficient space for protruding connectors must be provided below
the mounting cut-out (a minimum of 20 mm when using standard
cables)!
• check that the seal is correctly located!
• the tabs of the labeling strips must not be clamped behind the front
panel!
• the ventilation air slots in the housing may not be covered when the
unit is mounted!
• OP2 must be protected from direct solar radiation!
• insert the unit in the cut-out and ensure that it doesn’t fall until it has been
screwed into place.
• the labeling strip tabs may not be clamped-in.
Back panel
Threaded spindle
A
llen ke
y
• Mount the unit using the screw tensioners in the front panel; insert the
screw tensioners in the OP housing and rotate the threaded spindles
against the front panel.
Mounting
measures:
Operator control panel OP2
10-26 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
10.9 Battery change
The lithium battery is used to back-up the operating data in the static RAM
and to supply the CMOS clock module when the power supply is off.
NOTE The battery may only be changed with the power supply voltage
powered-up in order to prevent data loss!
1. Remove the battery cover and remove the battery from its holder.
2. Remove the battery connector from the cable
3. Insert the new battery in the reverse order
Observe the EMC guidelines and the safety-related information.
Ordering spare parts:
Siemens AG, Gerätewerk-Karlsruhe
Lithium battery 3.6 V, 1800 mAh, Order No.: W79084-E-1001-B2
!
WARNING
DANGER
• For safety reasons, it is not permissible that lithium batteries are in
the equipment when it is transported unless the battery
manufacturer permits this expressly using an appropriate
declaration.
• When the equipment is stored and shipped, the batteries must be
individually and separately packed in a non-conductive material.
• There is a danger of explosion if they are not correctly handled. We
can accept no liability for incorrectly handled batteries.
• Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with national and
European legislation and regulations.
• The lithium batteries must be removed from the battery holder
before the subrack or power supply is disposed of.
10.10 Connecting elements
R S48 5
Ground connection
Terminal block / power supply
DR210/211-N, DR230/231-N
Printer
V.24/TTY
USS-
USS master
SS1/IF1 SS2A/IF2A SS2B/IF2B
OP2
(
Lower side of the unit
)
Not used (V.24/TTY)
SIMADYN
D
Changing the
battery:
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-27
Edition 03.2001
10
10.11 Power supply
The 4-pole terminal block is used to connect the power supply voltage and
the authorization input. The authorization input is not used.
Connecting the individual conductors
7 mm
Conductor cross-section: 0.5 ...2.5mm
Terminal block connections
1
A
E
4
A
+
0 V
+24V DC
Power supply voltage
Not used
10.12 Baud rates
OP2 can be used on the USS bus with the following baud rates: 9.6 / 19.2 /
93.75 / 187.5 kbaud.
10.13 Cables and connectors
OP2 is always connected to interface SS2B
(RS-485 / USS-BUS).
PIN RS 485
1
2
3 Data B
4
5 GND
6 +5 V
7
8 Data A
9
5
96
1
Fig. 10-1 Assignment SS 2B
NOTE When connecting to an RS-485 bus (e. g. SS4 communications
module):
Data B = RS485+
Data A = RS485-
Connector
assignment
Operator control panel OP2
10-28 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
The connection is realized via a 9-pin sub-D connector with the following
circuit configuration:
A) Connection as a node (station) at the center of the BUS
DATA B
DATA A
B
A
B
A
(3)
(8) BUS cable
9-pin sub-D
B) Connected as node at the end of the BUS (with bus termination):
P
N
BUS-Kabel
9-polig Sub-D
150Ω
390Ω
390Ω
(6)
(3)
(8)
(5)
+5 V
Data B
Data A
End
A bus terminating resistor network must be installed in connector 4 (refer
to the appropriate information specified with communications module SS4)
Bus connection
and cable
Operator control panel OP2
Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-29
Edition 03.2001
10
10.14 Using a printer with OP2
10.14.1 Configuring the printer
The OP2 printer interface at the unit can be parameterized in two settings:
1. XON/XOFF protocol; formatted message texts are transferred to a
printer, whereby OP2 specifies the formatting.
2. XON/XOFF protocol with ETX/ACK; formatted message texts are
transferred to a printer, whereby OP2 specifies the formatting. After each
message, OP2 transmits an ETX (End of Text), which is acknowledged
by the printer (e. g. Mannesmann Tally printer) with ACK (acknowledge).
Only then can OP2 transmit a new message.
10.14.2 Printer connection
A printer is always connected at interface SS1 of the OP2.
Pre-assembled cables are available for Siemens printers DR210-N / DR211-
N / DR230-N / DR231-N:
• 6XV1 440-2B... for TTY data transfer
• 6XV1 440-2C... for V.24 data transfer
...= length code, refer to Catalog ST80
These cables can also be used for PT 88/89/90 printers. If required you
must assemble a different cable for other printers.
NOTE Siemens AG accepts no liability for incorrect functioning and damage
which are caused by using self-assembled cables or cables from third-
parties!
PIN General V.24 TTY
1 Screen
2 RxD-
3 RxD
4 TxD
5 CTS
6 TxD+
7 TxD-
8 Screen
9 RxD+
10 RTS
11 +20mA
12 GND
13 +20mA
14 +5V
15 GND
81
15 9
Fig. 10-2 Assignment SS 1 and SS 2
Operator control panel OP2
10-30 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Edition 03.2001
10.15 Labeling and replacing the labeling strips
The function keys of the OP2 are labeled with B1 to B4 and V1 to V12 when
they are shipped from the factory. A set of (4 x) unlabeled strips are provided
with the OP2 so that customers can make their own key labels. When these
labels are used, they cover the standard labels.
!
CAUTION Before inserting the labeling strips, the labeling must be smear proof,
as a membrane keyboard, cannot be cleaned inside. The front panel
can only be replaced by a service workshop incurring considerable
costs.
If necessary, remove old labeling strips at the tabs.
Carefully insert label strips with smear-proof labeling.
SS1/IF1 SS2A/IF2A SS2B/IF2B
OP2
(Lower unit side)
Fig. 10-3 Lower side of the unit showing the labeling strips
If the OP2 is already mounted, we recommend that the screw tensioners are
released and the unit is carefully raised towards the front out of the cut-out.
NOTE Do not suspend the OP 2 at its connecting cables!
The following dimension drawing shows the individual labeling strips and the
visible fields (which can be used for labeling):
14,2
88
3 x 16,7 = 50,1
16,7 2,5
14 (4x)
Fig. 10-4 Dimension drawing, labeling strips
If you make your own labeling strips using the dimension drawing above,
observe that they should not be more than 0.1 mm thick!
Hardware - SIMADYN D I-1
Edition 05.2006
Index
C
Communications carrier module CS8 ........................................................................................... 6-8
Communications module SS4..................................................................................................... 6-31
SS4 at OP2 or VD1 .................................................................................................................. 6-33
Communications module SS5, SS52 .......................................................................................... 6-41
Communications subrack CS7......................................................................................................6-2
Conversion
Plug-in cables............................................................................................................................. 9-3
Converter control ITDC ............................................................................................................... 5-45
Coupling memory module MM11, MM3, MM4 .............................................................................. 4-2
CPU module PM5.......................................................................................................................... 3-2
CPU module PM6........................................................................................................................ 3-11
CS12-CS22
Application information............................................................................................................. 6-19
Cascading ................................................................................................................................ 6-18
Description ............................................................................................................................... 6-15
Slave connection...................................................................................................................... 6-16
Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 6-19
Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-20
CS7
Application information............................................................................................................... 6-4
Connection diagram ................................................................................................................... 6-7
Description ................................................................................................................................. 6-2
Interface to the communications module ................................................................................... 6-3
Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 6-6
CS8
Application information............................................................................................................... 6-9
Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 6-11
Description ................................................................................................................................. 6-8
Interface to the communications module ................................................................................... 6-8
Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-11
CSH11
Application information............................................................................................................. 6-13
Connecting to SINEC H1 ......................................................................................................... 6-12
Connector assignments ........................................................................................................... 6-13
Description ............................................................................................................................... 6-12
Parameterizing interface .......................................................................................................... 6-12
Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-14
E
EA12
Adjustment procedure ................................................................................................................ 5-2
Analog outputs ........................................................................................................................... 5-5
Application information............................................................................................................... 5-4
Connection diagram ................................................................................................................... 5-6
Index
I-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Ausgabe 05.2006
Connector assignments..............................................................................................................5-4
Description..................................................................................................................................5-2
Noise signals .............................................................................................................................. 5-2
Supplementary components.......................................................................................................5-2
Technical data ............................................................................................................................5-5
EB11
Application information .............................................................................................................5-13
Binary inputs.............................................................................................................................5-14
Binary outputs...........................................................................................................................5-14
Cables ........................................................................................................................................5-8
Connection diagram .................................................................................................................5-15
Connector assignments..............................................................................................................5-9
Description..................................................................................................................................5-7
Supplementary components.......................................................................................................5-8
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................5-14
Terminal assignments ................................................................................................................5-9
EP3 with IS_x
Description................................................................................................................................3-17
IS_1,IS_2 and IS_3 ..................................................................................................................3-17
Expansion module IT41...............................................................................................................5-16
Expansion module IT42...............................................................................................................5-33
F
Fiber-optic cable subrack coupling CS12-CS22 .........................................................................6-15
I
I/O module EA12 ...........................................................................................................................5-2
I/O module EB11 ...........................................................................................................................5-7
Interface module SB10................................................................................................................8-11
Interface module SB60................................................................................................................8-17
Interface module SB61................................................................................................................8-22
Interface module SB70................................................................................................................8-29
Interface module SB71................................................................................................................8-35
Interface module SE13.1...............................................................................................................8-4
Interface module SE26.1...............................................................................................................8-7
Interface modules
Overview of plug-in cables .........................................................................................................9-3
Interface submodule SS2 ............................................................................................................6-27
IT41
15 V incremental encoder ........................................................................................................ 5-29
5 V incremental encoder ..........................................................................................................5-30
Analog inputs............................................................................................................................5-28
Analog outputs..........................................................................................................................5-28
Application information .............................................................................................................5-27
Binary inputs.............................................................................................................................5-29
Binary outputs...........................................................................................................................5-29
Block diagram...........................................................................................................................5-16
Cables ......................................................................................................................................5-19
Coding connector .....................................................................................................................5-18
Connection diagram .................................................................................................................5-31
Connector assignments............................................................................................................5-20
Description................................................................................................................................5-16
Inputs and outputs....................................................................................................................5-16
Index
Hardware - SIMADYN D I-3
Ausgabe 05.2006
Installation ................................................................................................................................ 5-27
Interrupt inputs ......................................................................................................................... 5-30
Interrupt reset outputs .............................................................................................................. 5-30
Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 5-19
Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 5-28
IT42
Analog inputs, integrating......................................................................................................... 5-42
Analog inputs, sampling ........................................................................................................... 5-42
Analog outputs ......................................................................................................................... 5-43
Application information............................................................................................................. 5-41
Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 5-43
Binary outputs .......................................................................................................................... 5-43
Block diagram........................................................................................................................... 5-33
Cables ...................................................................................................................................... 5-34
Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 5-44
Connector assignments ........................................................................................................... 5-35
Description ............................................................................................................................... 5-33
Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................... 5-33
Installation ................................................................................................................................ 5-41
Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 5-34
Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 5-42
ITDC
Analog outputs ......................................................................................................................... 5-53
Application information............................................................................................................. 5-55
Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 5-53
Binary outputs .......................................................................................................................... 5-54
Block diagram........................................................................................................................... 5-47
Cables ...................................................................................................................................... 5-48
Coding plug .............................................................................................................................. 5-45
Connecting diagram ................................................................................................................. 5-55
Connector assignments ........................................................................................................... 5-49
Description ............................................................................................................................... 5-45
Incremental encoders 15 V ...................................................................................................... 5-54
Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................... 5-45
Mounting/installation................................................................................................................. 5-54
Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 5-48
Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 5-53
ITSL
Application information............................................................................................................. 6-21
Description ............................................................................................................................... 6-21
Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................... 6-21
Installation ................................................................................................................................ 6-21
Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 6-21
Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-22
M
MM11, MM3, MM4
Description ................................................................................................................................. 4-2
Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 4-7
MM3
Radio clock DCF-77 ................................................................................................................... 4-4
Real-time clock........................................................................................................................... 4-3
Module CSH11 ............................................................................................................................ 6-12
MS5, MS51, MS52
Index
I-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Ausgabe 05.2006
Description..................................................................................................................................8-2
Program size ..............................................................................................................................8-2
Technical data ............................................................................................................................8-3
O
OP2
Battery change .......................................................................................................................10-26
Cables and connectors...........................................................................................................10-27
Connections............................................................................................................................10-26
Function overview ....................................................................................................................10-2
Installation ..............................................................................................................................10-25
Operating messages ..............................................................................................................10-21
Printer operation.....................................................................................................................10-29
Process data handling..............................................................................................................10-3
System message....................................................................................................................10-20
Operator panel OP2 ....................................................................................................................10-2
P
Plug-in cables ................................................................................................................................9-2
Cable types.................................................................................................................................9-4
Conversion .................................................................................................................................9-3
Description..................................................................................................................................9-2
How they can be connected to modules ....................................................................................9-3
Overview.....................................................................................................................................9-3
Ribbon cable SC13 ....................................................................................................................9-5
Ribbon cable SC17.2 .................................................................................................................9-6
Ribbon cable SC31.2 .................................................................................................................9-6
Ribbon cable SC7 ......................................................................................................................9-4
Ribbon cables SC55.................................................................................................................9-12
Round cable SC12 .....................................................................................................................9-4
Round cable SC49 .....................................................................................................................9-7
Round cable SC50 .....................................................................................................................9-8
Round cable SC51 .....................................................................................................................9-9
Round cable SC54 ...................................................................................................................9-10
Round cable SC57 ...................................................................................................................9-13
Technical data ............................................................................................................................9-2
PM5
7-segment display ......................................................................................................................3-5
Absolute value encoder..............................................................................................................3-4
Button .........................................................................................................................................3-6
Connection diagram .................................................................................................................3-10
Connector assignments..............................................................................................................3-7
Description..................................................................................................................................3-2
Incremental encoder...................................................................................................................3-4
Inputs..........................................................................................................................................3-3
Interface module.........................................................................................................................3-4
Performance data.......................................................................................................................3-2
Program memory module...........................................................................................................3-3
Program size ..............................................................................................................................3-3
Programming..............................................................................................................................3-2
Real-time clock...........................................................................................................................3-6
Select connections .....................................................................................................................3-3
Service interface.........................................................................................................................3-3
Index
Hardware - SIMADYN D I-5
Ausgabe 05.2006
Software protection .................................................................................................................... 3-6
Supplementary components ...................................................................................................... 3-7
Technical Data ........................................................................................................................... 3-8
PM6
7-segment display .................................................................................................................... 3-13
Application instructions............................................................................................................. 3-15
Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 3-12
Button ....................................................................................................................................... 3-14
Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 3-16
Description ............................................................................................................................... 3-11
Interface module....................................................................................................................... 3-12
Performance data..................................................................................................................... 3-11
Program memory module......................................................................................................... 3-12
Program size ............................................................................................................................ 3-11
Programming............................................................................................................................ 3-11
Real-time clock......................................................................................................................... 3-14
Service interface....................................................................................................................... 3-12
Softwareschutz......................................................................................................................... 3-14
Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 3-15
Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 3-15
Program memory modules MS5, MS51, MS52............................................................................. 8-2
R
Radio clock DCF-77
Clock setting............................................................................................................................... 4-5
Receive status............................................................................................................................ 4-6
Time display ............................................................................................................................... 4-5
Ribbon cable
40 core 4 x 10 core..................................................................................................................... 9-5
Ribbon cable
10 core SC7 ............................................................................................................................... 9-4
40 core/2 x 20 core SC55 ........................................................................................................ 9-12
50 core SC17.2 .......................................................................................................................... 9-6
50 core SC31.2 .......................................................................................................................... 9-6
Ribbon cable SC13 ....................................................................................................................... 9-5
Ribbon cable SC17.2 .................................................................................................................... 9-6
Ribbon cable SC31.2 .................................................................................................................... 9-6
Ribbon cable SC55 ..................................................................................................................... 9-12
Ribbon cable SC7 ......................................................................................................................... 9-4
Round cable
15 core/26 core SC50 ................................................................................................................ 9-8
20 core, twisted pairs SC12 ....................................................................................................... 9-4
25 core/26 core SC51 ................................................................................................................ 9-9
50 core/2 x 26 core SC49 .......................................................................................................... 9-7
50 core/5 x 10 core SC54 ........................................................................................................ 9-10
9 core SC57 ............................................................................................................................. 9-13
with Adapter SC57 ................................................................................................................... 9-13
Round cable SC12 ........................................................................................................................ 9-4
Round cable SC49 ........................................................................................................................ 9-7
Round cable SC50 ........................................................................................................................ 9-8
Round cable SC51 ........................................................................................................................ 9-9
Round cable SC54 ...................................................................................................................... 9-10
Round cable SC57 ...................................................................................................................... 9-13
Index
I-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Ausgabe 05.2006
S
S12 and SR24
Number of slots ........................................................................................................................2-13
SB10
Application information .............................................................................................................8-13
Binary signals ...........................................................................................................................8-14
Block diagram...........................................................................................................................8-16
Connector assignments............................................................................................................8-15
Description................................................................................................................................8-11
Signals......................................................................................................................................8-12
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................8-14
SB60
Application information .............................................................................................................8-18
Binary inputs.............................................................................................................................8-19
Block diagram...........................................................................................................................8-21
Connector assignment .............................................................................................................8-20
Description................................................................................................................................8-17
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................8-19
Terminal assignments ..............................................................................................................8-17
SB61
Application information .............................................................................................................8-24
Binary inputs.............................................................................................................................8-26
Connector assignments............................................................................................................8-27
Description.......................................................................................................................8-22, 8-28
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................8-26
Terminal assignment ................................................................................................................8-23
Test socket ...............................................................................................................................8-23
SB70
Application information .............................................................................................................8-31
Binary outputs...........................................................................................................................8-32
Block diagram...........................................................................................................................8-34
Connector assignments............................................................................................................8-33
Description................................................................................................................................8-29
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................8-32
SB71
Application information .............................................................................................................8-37
Binary outputs...........................................................................................................................8-38
Block diagram...........................................................................................................................8-40
Connector assignments............................................................................................................8-39
Description................................................................................................................................8-35
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................8-38
Test socket ...............................................................................................................................8-36
SC12..............................................................................................................................................9-4
SC13..............................................................................................................................................9-5
SC17.2...........................................................................................................................................9-6
SC31.2...........................................................................................................................................9-6
SC49..............................................................................................................................................9-7
SC50..............................................................................................................................................9-8
SC51..............................................................................................................................................9-9
SC54............................................................................................................................................9-10
SC55............................................................................................................................................9-12
SC57............................................................................................................................................9-13
Adapter for CS7/SS4................................................................................................................9-13
SC7................................................................................................................................................9-4
Index
Hardware - SIMADYN D I-7
Ausgabe 05.2006
SE13.1
Application information............................................................................................................... 8-5
Description ................................................................................................................................. 8-4
T element ................................................................................................................................... 8-4
Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 8-5
Voltage divider............................................................................................................................ 8-5
SE26.1
Application information............................................................................................................... 8-8
Connecting example................................................................................................................... 8-8
Connector assignment ............................................................................................................... 8-9
Description ................................................................................................................................. 8-7
Diagrams .................................................................................................................................. 8-10
Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 8-9
Signal processor module EP3 with IS_x ..................................................................................... 3-17
SIMOLINK interface ITSL............................................................................................................ 6-21
SR12 and SR24
Installation Guidelines .............................................................................................................. 2-19
Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 2-21
SR12 and SR24
Backplane buses ...................................................................................................................... 2-17
Backplane connector................................................................................................................ 2-18
Battery back-up ........................................................................................................................ 2-16
Connection assignment............................................................................................................ 2-14
Daisy chain-jumpers................................................................................................................. 2-17
Description ............................................................................................................................... 2-13
Input voltage............................................................................................................................. 2-15
Output voltage .......................................................................................................................... 2-15
Power supply............................................................................................................................ 2-13
Ventilation/cooling .................................................................................................................... 2-19
SR12 and SR24 subracks........................................................................................................... 2-13
SR12 und SR24
Technische Daten .................................................................................................................... 2-21
SR6 and SR6V
Backplane bus............................................................................................................................ 2-5
Battery back-up .......................................................................................................................... 2-4
Connection elements.................................................................................................................. 2-2
Daisy chain jumper..................................................................................................................... 2-5
Description ................................................................................................................................. 2-2
Dimension drawings................................................................................................................. 2-11
Installation Guidelines ................................................................................................................ 2-7
Power supply.............................................................................................................................. 2-2
Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 2-8
Ventilation/cooling ...................................................................................................................... 2-6
SR6 and SR6V subracks............................................................................................................... 2-2
SRT400
Battery back-up ........................................................................................................................ 2-28
Description ............................................................................................................................... 2-26
Input voltage............................................................................................................................. 2-27
Mounting guidelines and noise immunity ................................................................................. 2-28
Output voltage .......................................................................................................................... 2-27
Power supply............................................................................................................................ 2-26
Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 2-29
Ventilation/cooling .................................................................................................................... 2-28
SRT400
Description ................................................................................................................................. 7-2
Index
I-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Ausgabe 05.2006
Dimension drawing...................................................................................................................2-31
SS1
Description................................................................................................................................6-23
Pin assignment.........................................................................................................................6-26
Recommended connection.......................................................................................................6-23
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................6-26
SS1 interface submodule ............................................................................................................6-23
SS2
Description................................................................................................................................6-27
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................6-28
SS31
Description................................................................................................................................6-29
Enabling the transmitter ...........................................................................................................6-29
Pin assignment.........................................................................................................................6-29
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................6-30
SS31 interface submodule ..........................................................................................................6-29
SS4
Carrier module CS7..................................................................................................................6-31
Configuration Guidelines ..........................................................................................................6-36
Connector assignment .............................................................................................................6-39
Description................................................................................................................................6-31
Diagnostic functions .................................................................................................................6-37
Diagnostics interface X5...........................................................................................................6-38
Interface....................................................................................................................................6-31
PC.............................................................................................................................................6-31
Programmer..............................................................................................................................6-31
Supplementary components..................................................................................................... 6-36
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................6-40
USS connection for PO2, VD1PC ............................................................................................6-33
SS5
Parameterizing .........................................................................................................................6-42
SS5, SS52
Configuration Guidelines ..........................................................................................................6-43
Connector assignments............................................................................................................6-44
Description................................................................................................................................6-41
Diagnostics LED.......................................................................................................................6-43
Profibus ....................................................................................................................................6-41
Supplementary components..................................................................................................... 6-42
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................6-45
SS52
Drive program...........................................................................................................................6-42
Parameterizing .........................................................................................................................6-42
SS53load..................................................................................................................................6-42
SU10, SU11, SU12 and SU13
Application information .............................................................................................................8-44
Function description .................................................................................................................8-42
General.....................................................................................................................................8-41
Pin assignment.........................................................................................................................8-44
Process signals ........................................................................................................................8-42
Supplementary components..................................................................................................... 8-43
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................8-46
Terminal assignment ................................................................................................................8-44
Subrack SRT400 .........................................................................................................................2-26
Index
Hardware - SIMADYN D I-9
Ausgabe 05.2006
T
T400
Absolute value encoders............................................................................................................ 7-7
Analog inputs............................................................................................................................ 7-13
Analog outputs ......................................................................................................................... 7-13
Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 7-13
Binary outputs .......................................................................................................................... 7-14
Coarse/fine pulse evaluation...................................................................................................... 7-4
Description ................................................................................................................................. 7-2
Incremental encoder................................................................................................................... 7-4
Incremental encoder 15 V ........................................................................................................7-14
Inputs/outputs............................................................................................................................. 7-3
Mechanical design...................................................................................................................... 7-4
Parameters............................................................................................................................... 7-10
Serial interfaces.......................................................................................................................... 7-7
Software protection .................................................................................................................... 7-4
Synchronizing............................................................................................................................. 7-9
Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 7-12
Terminal assignment................................................................................................................ 7-10
Terminals.................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Technical data SIMADYN D
Ambient conditions................................................................................................................... 1-18
Application and operation........................................................................................................... 1-4
Cabinet ....................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Cables ...............................................................................................................................1-6, 1-14
Connecting external voltages..................................................................................................... 1-6
Design- und EMC Guidelines..................................................................................................... 1-2
ESD .......................................................................................................................................... 1-15
Installation .................................................................................................................................. 1-6
Installation clearances.............................................................................................................. 1-10
Installation in equipement ........................................................................................................ 1-14
Introduction................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Potential bonding........................................................................................................................ 1-6
Power loss in the cabinet ......................................................................................................... 1-11
Power supply............................................................................................................................ 1-12
Protective grounding .................................................................................................................. 1-9
Radios ........................................................................................................................................ 1-9
Shipping modules..................................................................................................................... 1-17
Subracks.................................................................................................................................. 1-13
Technology module T400.............................................................................................................. 7-2
Technology subrack SRT400........................................................................................................ 7-2
Index
I-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D
Ausgabe 05.2006
